DS457 FIXED MOUNT

IMAGER
INTEGRATION GUIDE
DS457 FIXED MOUNT IMAGER
INTEGRATION GUIDE
72E-144361-05
Revision A
December 2017
ii DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing
from Zebra. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems.
The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.

The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Zebra
grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed
program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written
consent of Zebra. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user
shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from
a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Zebra. The user agrees to maintain Zebra’s
copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in
part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any
portion thereof.

Zebra reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.

Zebra does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application
described herein.

No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Zebra Technologies Corporation intellectual
property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Zebra products.

ZEBRA, ZEBRA TECHNOLOGIES and the Stylized Z logo are trademarks of ZIH Corp, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All
product names and numbers are Zebra trademarks. The Symbol logo is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies, Inc., a Zebra
Technologies company.

This media, or Zebra Product, may include Zebra Software, Commercial Third Party Software, and Publicly Available Software.

The Zebra Software that may be included on this media, or included in the Zebra Product, is Copyright (c) by Zebra Technologies
Corporation, and its use is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Zebra
Product.

The Commercial Third Party Software that may be included on this media, or included in the Zebra Product, is subject to the licenses,
terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Zebra Product and Zebra Technologies Corporation, unless a
separate Commercial Third Party Software License is included, in which case, your use of the Commercial Third Party Software will then
be governed by the separate Commercial Third Party License.

The Publicly Available Software that may be included on this media, or in the Zebra Product, is listed below. The use of the listed Publicly
Available Software is subject to the licenses, terms and conditions of the agreement in force between the purchaser of the Zebra Product
and Zebra Technologies Corporation, as well as, the terms and conditions of the license of each Publicly Available Software package.
Copies of the licenses for the listed Publicly Available Software, as well as, all attributions, acknowledgements, and software information
details, are included below. Zebra is required to reproduce the software licenses, acknowledgments and copyright notices as provided by
the Authors and Owners, thus, all such information is provided in its native language form, without modification or translation.

The Publicly Available Software in the list below is limited to the Publicly Available Software included by Zebra. The Publicly Available
Software included by Commercial Third Party Software or Products, that is used in the Zebra Product, are disclosed in the Commerical
Third Party Licenses, or via the respective Commercial Third Party Publicly Available Software Legal Notices.

Publicly available software list:

Name: Regular Expression Evaluator
Version: 8.3
Description: Compiles and executes regular expressions
Software Site: http://www.freebsd.org/cgi/cvsweb.cgi/src/lib/libc/regex/
Source Code: No Source Distribution Obligations. Zebra will not provide nor distribute the Source Code for the
Regular Expression Evaluator.
License: BSD Style License

© 1992 Henry Spencer.

© 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Henry Spencer of the University of Toronto. Redistribution and use in source
and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
 iii

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Warranty
For the complete Zebra hardware product warranty statement, go to:
http://www.zebra.com/warranty
iv DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:

Change Date Description

-01 Rev A 6/2011 Initial release

-02 Rev A 9/2012 Clarify that SSI is the default serial host; update URLs and service information,
update 123Scan2 chapter, update Driver’s License Setup chapter to remove server
based parsing algorithms and jurisdictional updates references

-03 Rev A 4/2014 - Added parameter attribute numbers.

- Added Presentation Performance Mode, Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode,
Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode, and Power Up Light in Presentation
Mode.
- Removed Motion Enhancement in Presentation Mode parameter and
sub-parameters.
- Added Unique Bar Code Reporting.
- Added Multicode Mode Concatenation and Multicode Concatenation
Symbology.
- Moved Miscellaneous Parameters chapter content into User Preferences
chapter.
- Added Video Mode Format Selector.
- Added CUTE serial host.
- Added code types to serial host parameters table.
- For USB Device Type:
- Change HID Keyboard Emulation to USB Keyboard (HID).
- Change USB OPOS Hand-Held to IBM OPOS (IBM Hand-Held USB with
Full Scan Disable) and added related note.
- Added following parameters to USB chapter: Quick Keypad Emulation, USB
Ignore Beep Directive, USB Ignore Type Directive, USB Polling Interval,
Fast HID, IBM Specification Level.
- Added new OCR-B Variant options and OCR Inverse parameter.
- Added Code 128, Code 39, and I 2 of 5 Security Levels.
- Added Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Character Transmission.
- Added GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level.
- Updated defaults for the following parameters: PDF Prioritization Timeout,
JPEG Size Value, Image File Meta Data, Image Edge Sharpening, I 2 of 5
Lengths, US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal, Australia Post,
Netherlands KIX Code, GS1 DataBar Limited, UPC Composite Mode, Decode
Mirror Images, Maxicode, Aztec Inverse
- Updated 123Scan2 chapter.

-04 Rev A 3/2015 Zebra Re-branding, add statement to temperature specification.

-05 Rev A 12/2017 Updated SSI Baud Rate bar code caption values
Changed USB Keyboard HID to USB HID Keyboard
Changed IBM OPOS (IBM Hand-Held USB with Full Scan Disable) option to
OPOS (IBM Hand-held with Full Disable)
Changed GS1 DataBar-14 references to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
Updated 123Scan chapter
Removed Glossary
TABLE OF CONTENTS

About This Guide

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... xv
Configurations................................................................................................................................. xv
Chapter Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... xv
Notational Conventions................................................................................................................... xvi
Related Documents ........................................................................................................................ xvii
Service Information ......................................................................................................................... xviii

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1
DS457 Features ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
Theory of Operation ....................................................................................................................... 1-2
DS457 Block Diagram Descriptions ......................................................................................... 1-3
DS457 Decoder/Interface Board .............................................................................................. 1-4

Chapter 2: Installation
Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Unpacking ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Mounting ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2
DS457 Mounting Dimensions .................................................................................................. 2-2
Mounting the Imager on the Gooseneck Stand ....................................................................... 2-3
Mounting the Imager on the POS Stand .................................................................................. 2-5
Mounting the Imager on the MS320X Conversion Mounting Bracket ...................................... 2-7
Connecting the DS457 ................................................................................................................... 2-8
USB Host Connection .............................................................................................................. 2-8
Serial Host Connection ............................................................................................................ 2-9
Trigger Jack Connector Pins .................................................................................................... 2-10
Location and Positioning ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Embedded Applications Requiring a Window ................................................................................ 2-11
Window Material ...................................................................................................................... 2-11
Window Coatings ..................................................................................................................... 2-12
Embedded Window Angle and Position ................................................................................... 2-13
vi DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Recommended Exit Window Information ....................................................................................... 2-15

Exit Window Notes ................................................................................................................... 2-15
Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 2-16
Simple Serial Interface Software Developer's Kit (SSI SDK) ................................................... 2-17
Zebra SNAPI Software Developer's Kit ................................................................................... 2-17

Chapter 3: Imaging
Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Imaging System ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
Aiming Pattern ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Aiming Error ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
Aiming Control ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Illumination System .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Illumination Control .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Frame Rate Control ................................................................................................................. 3-2
Capturing Data ............................................................................................................................... 3-3
Beeper and Decode LED Indications ............................................................................................. 3-4
Supported Symbologies ................................................................................................................. 3-5
Operating Modes ........................................................................................................................... 3-5

Chapter 4: Specifications
Electrical Interface ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
Dimension Drawings ...................................................................................................................... 4-2
DS457 Imager Technical Specifications ........................................................................................ 4-3
Skew, Pitch and Roll ................................................................................................................ 4-5
Decode Zones ............................................................................................................................... 4-6
DS457-SR/DL .......................................................................................................................... 4-6
DS457-HD/DP .......................................................................................................................... 4-9

Chapter 5: Maintenance & Troubleshooting

Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 5-1
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Cleaning the Connector ........................................................................................................... 5-1
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 5-2

Chapter 6: User Preferences

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Host Selection .......................................................................................................................... 6-1
Phantom Scan Session ............................................................................................................ 6-1
Changing Default Values ............................................................................................................... 6-2
Scanning Sequence Examples ...................................................................................................... 6-2
Errors While Scanning ................................................................................................................... 6-2
User Preferences Parameter Defaults ........................................................................................... 6-3
User Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................................. 6-5
Parameter Scanning ................................................................................................................ 6-6
User Parameter Pass Through ................................................................................................ 6-7
 Table of Contents vii

Beep After Good Decode ......................................................................................................... 6-8

Beeper Tone ............................................................................................................................ 6-9
Beeper Volume ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
Suppress Power-up Beeps ...................................................................................................... 6-10
Trigger Mode ............................................................................................................................ 6-11
Presentation Performance Mode ............................................................................................. 6-12
Power Mode (RS-232 Hosts Only) ........................................................................................... 6-17
Time Delay to Low Power Mode .............................................................................................. 6-17
Picklist Mode ............................................................................................................................ 6-19
Decode Session Timeout ......................................................................................................... 6-19
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................................. 6-20
Continuous Bar Code Read ..................................................................................................... 6-20
Unique Bar Code Reporting ..................................................................................................... 6-21
Mirrored Image ......................................................................................................................... 6-21
Mobile Phone/Display Mode .................................................................................................... 6-22
Validate Concatenated Parameter Bar Codes ......................................................................... 6-22
PDF Prioritization ..................................................................................................................... 6-23
PDF Prioritization Timeout ....................................................................................................... 6-23
Multicode Mode ........................................................................................................................ 6-24
Multicode Expression ............................................................................................................... 6-25
Multicode Mode Concatenation ............................................................................................... 6-33
Multicode Concatenation Symbology ....................................................................................... 6-34
Multicode Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 6-35
Miscellaneous Parameters ............................................................................................................. 6-37
Transmit Code ID Character .................................................................................................... 6-37
Prefix/Suffix Values .................................................................................................................. 6-38
Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................................. 6-39
FN1 Substitution Values .......................................................................................................... 6-40
Transmit “No Read” Message .................................................................................................. 6-41
Report Version ......................................................................................................................... 6-41

Chapter 7: Imager Preferences

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ...................................................................................................... 7-2
Errors While Scanning ................................................................................................................... 7-2
Imager Preferences Parameter Defaults ....................................................................................... 7-2
Imager Preferences ....................................................................................................................... 7-4
Operational Modes ................................................................................................................... 7-4
Decoding Autoexposure ........................................................................................................... 7-5
Decoding Illumination ............................................................................................................... 7-6
Decode Aiming Pattern ............................................................................................................ 7-6
Aim Brightness ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
Illumination Brightness ............................................................................................................. 7-7
Low Light Enhancement .......................................................................................................... 7-8
Power Up Light in Presentation Mode ..................................................................................... 7-8
Presentation Mode Field of View ............................................................................................. 7-9
Frame Rate .............................................................................................................................. 7-10
Image Capture Autoexposure .................................................................................................. 7-12
Image Capture Illumination ...................................................................................................... 7-12
Fixed Gain ................................................................................................................................ 7-13
viii DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Exposure Time ......................................................................................................................... 7-13

Snapshot Mode Timeout .......................................................................................................... 7-14
Snapshot Aiming Pattern ......................................................................................................... 7-14
Presentation Snapshot by Motion ............................................................................................ 7-15
Continuous Snapshot ............................................................................................................... 7-15
Image Cropping ....................................................................................................................... 7-16
Crop to Pixel Addresses .......................................................................................................... 7-17
Image Resolution ..................................................................................................................... 7-18
Image Brightness (Target White) ............................................................................................. 7-19
Image File Format Selector ...................................................................................................... 7-20
JPEG Image Options ............................................................................................................... 7-20
JPEG Quality and Size Value .................................................................................................. 7-21
Image File Meta Data ............................................................................................................... 7-22
Image Enhancement ................................................................................................................ 7-23
Image Edge Sharpening .......................................................................................................... 7-24
Image Contrast Enhancement ................................................................................................. 7-25
Image Rotation ......................................................................................................................... 7-26
Bits per Pixel ............................................................................................................................ 7-27
Signature Capture .................................................................................................................... 7-28
Signature Capture File Format Selector .................................................................................. 7-29
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel .............................................................................................. 7-30
Signature Capture Width .......................................................................................................... 7-30
Signature Capture Height ........................................................................................................ 7-31
Signature Capture JPEG Quality ............................................................................................. 7-31
Video Mode Format Selector ................................................................................................... 7-32
Video View Finder .................................................................................................................... 7-32
Target Video Frame Size ......................................................................................................... 7-33
Video View Finder Image Size ................................................................................................. 7-33
Video Resolution ...................................................................................................................... 7-34

Chapter 8: SSI Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Communications ............................................................................................................................ 8-1
SSI Transactions ........................................................................................................................... 8-3
General Data Transactions ...................................................................................................... 8-3
Transfer of Decode Data .......................................................................................................... 8-4
Communication Summary ............................................................................................................. 8-5
RTS/CTS Lines ........................................................................................................................ 8-5
ACK/NAK Option ...................................................................................................................... 8-5
Number of Data Bits ................................................................................................................. 8-5
Serial Response Time-out ....................................................................................................... 8-5
Retries ...................................................................................................................................... 8-5
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Time-out, ACK/NAK Handshake .............................. 8-6
Errors ....................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Things to Remember When Using SSI Communication ................................................................ 8-6
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI ........................................................................... 8-7
Simple Serial Interface Default Parameters ................................................................................... 8-8
SSI Host Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 8-9
Select SSI Host ........................................................................................................................ 8-9
Baud Rate ................................................................................................................................ 8-10
 Table of Contents ix

Parity ........................................................................................................................................ 8-11

Check Parity ............................................................................................................................. 8-12
Software Handshaking ............................................................................................................. 8-12
Host RTS Line State ................................................................................................................ 8-13
Decode Data Packet Format .................................................................................................... 8-13
Host Serial Response Time-out ............................................................................................... 8-14
Host Character Time-out .......................................................................................................... 8-15
Multipacket Option ................................................................................................................... 8-16
Interpacket Delay ..................................................................................................................... 8-17
Event Reporting ............................................................................................................................. 8-18
Decode Event .......................................................................................................................... 8-18
Boot Up Event .......................................................................................................................... 8-19
Parameter Event ...................................................................................................................... 8-19

Chapter 9: Serial Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 9-1
Serial Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................................. 9-2
Serial Host Parameters .................................................................................................................. 9-3
Serial Host Types ..................................................................................................................... 9-5
Baud Rate ................................................................................................................................ 9-7
Parity ........................................................................................................................................ 9-9
Data Bits .................................................................................................................................. 9-9
Check Receive Errors .............................................................................................................. 9-10
Hardware Handshaking ........................................................................................................... 9-11
Software Handshaking ............................................................................................................. 9-13
Host Serial Response Time-out ............................................................................................... 9-15
RTS Line State ......................................................................................................................... 9-16
Beep on <BEL> ........................................................................................................................ 9-16
Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................................. 9-17
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ....................................................................................................... 9-18
Ignore Unknown Characters .................................................................................................... 9-18
ASCII Character Set for Serial Hosts ............................................................................................. 9-19

Chapter 10: USB Interface

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 10-1
USB Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................ 10-2
USB Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 10-3
USB Device Type ..................................................................................................................... 10-3
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking .................................................................... 10-5
USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ..................................................................... 10-6
USB Keystroke Delay .............................................................................................................. 10-8
USB CAPS Lock Override ....................................................................................................... 10-8
USB Ignore Unknown Characters ............................................................................................ 10-9
Emulate Keypad ....................................................................................................................... 10-9
Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero ......................................................................................... 10-10
Quick Keypad Emulation .......................................................................................................... 10-10
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution .............................................................................................. 10-11
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................................. 10-11
Simulated Caps Lock ............................................................................................................... 10-12
x DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Convert Case ........................................................................................................................... 10-13

USB Static CDC ....................................................................................................................... 10-13
USB Ignore Beep Directive ...................................................................................................... 10-14
USB Ignore Type Directive ...................................................................................................... 10-14
USB Polling Interval ................................................................................................................. 10-15
Fast HID Keyboard .................................................................................................................. 10-17
IBM Specification Level ............................................................................................................ 10-17
ASCII Character Set for USB ......................................................................................................... 10-18

Chapter 11: OCR Reading

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 11-1
OCR Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................................... 11-2
OCR Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 11-3
Enable/Disable OCR-A ............................................................................................................ 11-3
OCR-A Variant ......................................................................................................................... 11-3
Enable/Disable OCR-B ............................................................................................................ 11-5
OCR-B Variant ......................................................................................................................... 11-6
Enable/Disable MICR E13B ..................................................................................................... 11-9
Enable/Disable US Currency Serial Number ........................................................................... 11-10
OCR Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 11-10
OCR Lines ............................................................................................................................... 11-12
OCR Minimum Characters ....................................................................................................... 11-13
OCR Maximum Characters ...................................................................................................... 11-13
OCR Security Level ................................................................................................................. 11-13
OCR Subset ............................................................................................................................. 11-14
OCR Quiet Zone ...................................................................................................................... 11-14
OCR Bright Illumination ........................................................................................................... 11-15
OCR Template ......................................................................................................................... 11-16
OCR Check Digit Modulus ....................................................................................................... 11-25
OCR Check Digit Multiplier ...................................................................................................... 11-26
OCR Check Digit Validation ..................................................................................................... 11-27
Inverse OCR ............................................................................................................................ 11-31

Chapter 12: Symbologies

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 12-1
Scanning Sequence Examples ...................................................................................................... 12-2
Errors While Scanning ................................................................................................................... 12-2
Symbology Parameter Defaults ..................................................................................................... 12-2
Disable All Symbologies ................................................................................................................ 12-8
UPC/EAN ....................................................................................................................................... 12-9
Enable/Disable UPC-A ............................................................................................................. 12-9
Enable/Disable UPC-E ............................................................................................................. 12-9
Enable/Disable UPC-E1 ........................................................................................................... 12-10
Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8 .................................................................................................. 12-10
Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13 .............................................................................................. 12-11
Enable/Disable Bookland EAN ................................................................................................ 12-11
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals ................................................................................... 12-12
User-Programmable Supplementals ........................................................................................ 12-15
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................................. 12-15
 Table of Contents xi

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format .......................................................................... 12-16

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit ................................................................................................... 12-17
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit ................................................................................................... 12-17
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................................. 12-18
UPC-A Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 12-19
UPC-E Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 12-20
UPC-E1 Preamble ................................................................................................................... 12-21
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ........................................................................................................ 12-22
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ...................................................................................................... 12-22
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend ............................................................................................................... 12-23
Bookland ISBN Format ............................................................................................................ 12-24
UCC Coupon Extended Code .................................................................................................. 12-25
Coupon Report ......................................................................................................................... 12-26
ISSN EAN ................................................................................................................................ 12-27
Code 128 ....................................................................................................................................... 12-28
Enable/Disable Code 128 ........................................................................................................ 12-28
Set Lengths for Code 128 ........................................................................................................ 12-28
Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ................................................................. 12-30
Enable/Disable ISBT 128 ......................................................................................................... 12-30
ISBT Concatenation ................................................................................................................. 12-31
Check ISBT Table .................................................................................................................... 12-32
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ............................................................................................ 12-32
Code 128 Security Level .......................................................................................................... 12-33
Code 39 ......................................................................................................................................... 12-34
Enable/Disable Code 39 .......................................................................................................... 12-34
Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 ............................................................................................. 12-34
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 ................................................................................................... 12-35
Code 32 Prefix ......................................................................................................................... 12-35
Set Lengths for Code 39 .......................................................................................................... 12-36
Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................. 12-37
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................................. 12-38
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion ............................................................................................... 12-38
Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) ........................................................................................... 12-39
Code 39 Security Level ............................................................................................................ 12-42
Code 93 ......................................................................................................................................... 12-43
Enable/Disable Code 93 .......................................................................................................... 12-43
Set Lengths for Code 93 .......................................................................................................... 12-43
Code 11 ......................................................................................................................................... 12-45
Code 11 ................................................................................................................................... 12-45
Set Lengths for Code 11 .......................................................................................................... 12-45
Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................. 12-47
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits ............................................................................................... 12-48
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) .................................................................................................................. 12-48
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 ............................................................................................ 12-48
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ............................................................................................ 12-49
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ................................................................................................ 12-50
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit .................................................................................................... 12-51
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ....................................................................................................... 12-51
I 2 of 5 Security Level .............................................................................................................. 12-52
xii DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) ..................................................................................................................... 12-53

Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................................. 12-53
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................................ 12-53
Codabar (NW - 7) .......................................................................................................................... 12-55
Enable/Disable Codabar .......................................................................................................... 12-55
Set Lengths for Codabar .......................................................................................................... 12-55
CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................................. 12-57
NOTIS Editing .......................................................................................................................... 12-57
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters Transmission ...................................... 12-58
MSI ................................................................................................................................................ 12-59
Enable/Disable MSI ................................................................................................................. 12-59
Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................................. 12-59
MSI Check Digits ..................................................................................................................... 12-61
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) .................................................................................................... 12-62
MSI Check Digit Algorithm ....................................................................................................... 12-62
Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ 12-63
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 ................................................................................................. 12-63
Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................................... 12-63
Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................... 12-63
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................... 12-64
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit .......................................................................................................... 12-65
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ........................................................................................... 12-65
Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................. 12-66
Enable/Disable Korean 3 of 5 .................................................................................................. 12-66
Inverse 1D ..................................................................................................................................... 12-67
Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................. 12-68
US Postnet ............................................................................................................................... 12-68
US Planet ................................................................................................................................. 12-68
Transmit US Postal Check Digit ............................................................................................... 12-69
UK Postal ................................................................................................................................. 12-69
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit ............................................................................................... 12-70
Japan Postal ............................................................................................................................ 12-70
Australia Post ........................................................................................................................... 12-71
Australia Post Format .............................................................................................................. 12-72
Netherlands KIX Code ............................................................................................................ 12-73
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ...................................................................................... 12-74
UPU FICS Postal ..................................................................................................................... 12-74
GS1 DataBar (formerly RSS, Reduced Space Symbology) .......................................................... 12-75
GS1 DataBar ............................................................................................................................ 12-75
GS1 DataBar Limited ............................................................................................................... 12-76
GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level ....................................................................................... 12-77
GS1 DataBar Expanded .......................................................................................................... 12-78
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN ......................................................................................... 12-78
Composite ...................................................................................................................................... 12-79
Composite CC-C ...................................................................................................................... 12-79
Composite CC-A/B ................................................................................................................... 12-79
Composite TLC-39 ................................................................................................................... 12-80
UPC Composite Mode ............................................................................................................. 12-81
Composite Beep Mode ............................................................................................................ 12-82
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes .................................................... 12-82
 Table of Contents xiii

2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................................. 12-83

Enable/Disable PDF417 ........................................................................................................... 12-83
Enable/Disable MicroPDF417 .................................................................................................. 12-83
Code 128 Emulation ................................................................................................................ 12-84
Data Matrix ............................................................................................................................... 12-85
Data Matrix Inverse .................................................................................................................. 12-86
Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) ............................................................................... 12-87
Maxicode .................................................................................................................................. 12-88
QR Code .................................................................................................................................. 12-88
QR Inverse ............................................................................................................................... 12-89
MicroQR ................................................................................................................................... 12-90
Aztec ........................................................................................................................................ 12-90
Aztec Inverse ........................................................................................................................... 12-91
Redundancy Level ......................................................................................................................... 12-92
Security Level ................................................................................................................................ 12-94
Intercharacter Gap Size ........................................................................................................... 12-95
Macro PDF Features ...................................................................................................................... 12-96
Macro PDF User Indications .................................................................................................... 12-96
Macro PDF Transmit / Decode Mode Symbols ........................................................................ 12-97
Transmit Macro PDF Control Header ...................................................................................... 12-98
Escape Characters .................................................................................................................. 12-98
Flush Macro Buffer ................................................................................................................... 12-99
Abort Macro PDF Entry ............................................................................................................ 12-99

Chapter 13: Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL)

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 13-1
Driver’s License Parsing ................................................................................................................ 13-1
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) ................................. 13-2
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type ....................................................... 13-2
Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes .................................................................................. 13-3
AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes ............................................................................................... 13-6
Parsing Rule Example ................................................................................................................... 13-16
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example ................................................................. 13-20
Field Update Procedure ................................................................................................................. 13-22
User Preferences ........................................................................................................................... 13-23
Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................................. 13-23
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ............................................ 13-23

Chapter 14: 123Scan

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 14-1
Communication with 123Scan ....................................................................................................... 14-1
123Scan Requirements ................................................................................................................. 14-2
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos ......................................................................... 14-2

Chapter 15: Advanced Data Formatting

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 15-1
xiv DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Appendix A: Standard Default Parameters

Default Parameters ........................................................................................................................ A-1
Reserved Parameters .................................................................................................................... A-13

Appendix B: Programming Reference

Code Identifiers .............................................................................................................................. B-1
AIM Code Identifiers ................................................................................................................ B-1

Appendix C: Sample Bar Codes

Code 39 ......................................................................................................................................... C-1
UPC/EAN ....................................................................................................................................... C-1
UPC-A, 100 % .......................................................................................................................... C-1
EAN-13, 100 % ........................................................................................................................ C-1
Code 128 ....................................................................................................................................... C-2
Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................................................... C-2
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional ....................................................................................................... C-2
PDF417 .......................................................................................................................................... C-2
Data Matrix .................................................................................................................................... C-3
Maxicode ....................................................................................................................................... C-3

Appendix D: Numeric Bar Codes

Numeric Bar Codes ....................................................................................................................... D-1
Cancel ............................................................................................................................................ D-3

Appendix E: ASCII Character Set

Index
ABOUT THIS GUIDE

Introduction
The DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide provides general instructions for mounting, setting up, and
programming the DS457 fixed mount imager.

Configurations
The DS457 offers the following configurations:

• DS457-SR - Standard range imager

• DS457-HD - High density imager
• DS457-DP - High density imager with Direct Part Marking (DPM) software
• DS457-DL - Standard range imager, driver’s license parsing

Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:

• Chapter 1, Getting Started provides an overview of the DS457 imager, including applications and a theory of
operation.
• Chapter 2, Installation provides mounting and connection information for the DS457, and lists accessories.
• Chapter 3, Imaging provides information on the aiming and illumination system, and includes imaging tips
and a list of supported symbologies.
• Chapter 4, Specifications provides technical specifications including electrical and mechanical information,
and provides decode ranges.
• Chapter 5, Maintenance & Troubleshooting provides maintenance and troubleshooting tips.
• Chapter 6, User Preferences provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features.
• Chapter 7, Imager Preferences provides programming bar codes for selecting imager preference features.
xvi DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

• Chapter 8, SSI Interface describes how to set up the decoder with a Simple Serial Interface (SSI) host.
Use SSI to program the decoder via bar code menu or SSI hosts commands.
• Chapter 9, Serial Interface describes how to set up the decoder with a serial host. Use the serial interface
to connect the decoder to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available serial
port (e.g., com port).
• Chapter 10, USB Interface describes how to set how to set up the decoder with a USB host. The decoder
connects directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub, and is powered by it.
• Chapter 11, OCR Reading describes how to set up the decoder for OCR programming.
• Chapter 12, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes
necessary for selecting these features for the decoder.
• Chapter 13, Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) describes how to program the DS457-DL imager to
read and use the data contained in the 2D bar codes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID
cards.
• Chapter 14, 123Scan provides information on the PC-based software tool that enables rapid and easy
customized setup of scanners by Zebra.
• Chapter 15, Advanced Data Formatting provides instructions for using ADF, a means of customizing data
before transmission to the host device.
• Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host and miscellaneous defaults.
• Appendix B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character
conversions, and keyboard maps.
• Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes of various code types.
• Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring
specific numeric values.
• Appendix E, ASCII Character Set provides ASCII character value tables.

Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:

• “Imager” refers to the DS457 imager

• “Engine” or “imaging engine” refers to the SE4500 imaging engine.
• Italics highlight chapters and sections in this and related documents
• Bullets (•) indicate:
• action items
• lists of alternatives
• lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
• Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
 About This Guide xvii

• Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter
settings.

* Indicates default *Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option

(6)
Option value for programming

NOTE This symbol indicates something of special interest or importance to the reader. Failure to read the note
will not result in physical harm to the reader, equipment or data.

CAUTION This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored, the possibility of data or material damage may
occur.

WARNING! This symbol indicates that if this information is ignored the possibility that serious personal
injury may occur.

Related Documents
• DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-144417-xx, provides information for setting
up the DS457.
• Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx, provides system requirements and
programming information about the Simple Serial Interface, which enables Zebra devices to
communicate with a serial host.
• Symbol Native Application Programming Interface (SNAPI) Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-71370-xx,
describes the Symbol Native Application Programming Interface (SNAPI), a development library used to
implement USB communication between a Zebra scanner and a Windows 98/2000/XP host.
• Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx, provides bar codes and instructions
for advanced programming of Zebra scanners and imagers.

For the latest version of these guides and software, and all Zebra guides, go to: http://www.zebra.com/support.
xviii DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Service Information
If you have a problem using the equipment, contact your facility's technical or systems support. If there is a
problem with the equipment, they will contact the Zebra Global Customer Support Center at:
http://www.zebra.com/support.

When contacting Zebra support, please have the following information available:

• Serial number of the unit

• Model number or product name
• Software type and version number
Zebra responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in service agreements.

If your problem cannot be solved by Zebra support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and
will be given specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the
approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.

If you purchased your business product from a Zebra business partner, please contact that business partner
for support.
CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED

Overview
CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or procedures other than those specified here can result in
! hazardous laser light exposure.

The DS457 fixed-mount imager is specifically designed for standalone applications and OEM applications. The
imager is extremely compact, provides easy and flexible integration into a host device, and offers
high-performance imaging on 1D and 2D bar codes. The DS457 is ideal for a wide variety of uses:
zero-footprint point-of-sale, kiosks, embedded diagnostic equipment, conveyor belts, and many more.

Indicator LED

Trigger Button
Imager Window I/O Connector

Figure 1-1 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager

This integration guide includes programming parameters and describes the theory of operation, installation,
specifications, and configuration.
1-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

DS457 Features
• Quick and easy integration for OEM devices
• Excellent imaging performance on all 1D and 2D bar codes
• RS-232 (serial) or USB interface
• Excellent motion tolerance
• LEDs indicating power status and successful decodes
• Trigger button for manual triggering
• Small footprint optimal for "Zero Footprint" POS scanning applications
• Direct Part Marking (DPM) support (DPM version only). Scan 2D symbols etched directly onto an item’s
surface (via laser etching and dot peening) for permanent identification.
• Driver's license (DL) parsing (DL version only)
• Easy programming and configuration
• Integrated threaded mounting screw holes
• Flexible mounting options
• IP54 sealing

Theory of Operation
During image capture:

1. The image sensor array in the embedded SE4500 imaging engine captures an image of the bar code
through the engine’s optical lens. If necessary, the engine automatically adjusts illumination, exposure, and
other parameters to obtain the best quality image.

2. The imaging engine sends the image to the DS457 CPU.

3. The DS457 CPU processes the image to identify the target bar code(s), decodes them, and transmits the
decoded data to the host.

Set various parameters provided in this guide to adjust the performance of the DS457 to match the application
or desired usage profile.
 Getting Started 1-3

Block Diagram
The DS457 imager block diagram illustrates the functional relationship of the DS457 components. This section
also provides a description of each component in the block diagrams.

SE4500 Engine

LED Illumination
Illumination LEDs WVGA Sensor
Driver

Laser Aimer Laser Aimer Driver Microprocessor

Decoder/Interface

Internal Beeper Internal Trigger PXA320

MIcrorprocessor,
RAM, and Flash
User Interface
Drivers

Green/Red LEDs Power Regulation Interface Circuitry

DB-9 Connector

Figure 1-2 DS457 Block Diagram

DS457 Block Diagram Descriptions

SE4500 Imaging Engine - The SE4500 imaging engine captures 8-bit gray scale WVGA images at up to 60
fps, which are sent uncompressed to a companion board for processing. The engine uses a red laser for intuitive
aiming and features LED illumination. The engine is available in two focusing configurations, providing a choice
between high resolution and longer depth of field.
DS457 Decoder/Interface Board - The decoder/interface board is a companion decoder module for the
SE4500 imaging engine, which controls the engine, receives images, decodes 1D and 2D symbologies, and
performs various image processing tasks. The board controls a beeper and red and green LEDs for acoustic
and visual feedback, respectively. It also provides imaging for an external trigger and external beeper via the
DB9 connector. The board supports asynchronous serial (the standard Symbol Simple Serial Interface/SSI
command set) and SNAPI (Symbol Native API) interfaces, as well as a variety of other USB and RS-232 host
interfaces.
DB9 - The DB9 connector provides an outlet for the various interface signals used between the DS457 and the
host. It also provides power to the unit.
1-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

DS457 Decoder/Interface Board

Marvell PXA320 Processor

The digital system is built on a Marvell PXA320 (Intel XScale®) super-pipelined RISC microarchitecture core.
The major features of the core are:

• CPU clock speed up to 624 MHz with external DDR SDRAM bus speed of 133 MHz.
• 32 KB instruction/32 KB data L1 cache, 256 KB unified L2 cache, 728 KB internal SRAM

Power Management
The DS457 decoder/interface board has various power management options depending on the host interface.

• USB (SNAPI, USB HID Keyboard, etc.) - The DS457 automatically manages its power usage, including
USB suspend mode. Additionally, when drawing power from the USB bus, the DS457 does not exceed
the USB limit of 500 mA.
• SSI or RS-232 - When using SSI or any RS-232 host interface, the DS457 uses one of the following power
modes. See Power Mode (RS-232 Hosts Only) on page 6-17.
• Continuous Power: The DS457 is fully awake and running, even when not in a decode session.
• Low Power (default): The DS457 draws less current at idle than when in Continuous Power mode.
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

Overview
This chapter provides information on unpacking, mounting, and installing the imager.

Unpacking
Remove the DS457 from its packing and inspect for damage. If the imager is damaged, call Zebra Global
Customer Support on page xviii.
KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment needs to be
returned for servicing.
2-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Mounting
There are two M3 x .5 tapped holes on the bottom of the DS457 housing for mounting. The following figures
provide the mounting dimensions.

NOTE Do not use screws that penetrate more than 3.5 mm into the bottom mousing of the DS457 since this is the
maximum depth of the useful thread.

DS457 Mounting Dimensions

Note: Dimensions are in mm.

Figure 2-1 DS457 Mounting Dimensions

 Installation 2-3

Mounting the Imager on the Gooseneck Stand

To mount the imager on the optional gooseneck stand:

1. Mount the DS457 to the mount plate. Align the imager so its window faces the short edge of the plate, and
its two threaded inserts align with the stand’s two mounting holes that are closest to the edge of the plastic.
Note that the imager requires only two screws for mounting.

2. Secure the imager to the stand using the two screws provided with the stand.

Assembling the Stand

1. Unscrew the wingnut
Imager mount from the bottom of the
one-piece mount.
2. Fit the bottom of the
neck piece into the
Mounting holes opening on the top of the
stand base.
3. Tighten the wingnut
underneath the base to
secure the cup and neck
piece (see the note
below).
Flat areas
4. Bend the neck to the
desired position for
scanning.

Stand base

Wingnut

Figure 2-2 Assembling the Gooseneck Stand

NOTE Before tightening the wingnut under the base, ensure that the flat areas on the flexible neck fit securely in
the grooves in the base.
2-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Mounting the Stand (optional)

You can attach the base of the stand to a flat surface using two screws or double-sided tape (not provided).

Screw Mount
1. Position the assembled base on a flat surface.

2. Screw one #10 wood screw into each screw-mount hole until the base of the stand is secure.

Tape Mount
1. Peel the paper liner off one side of each piece of tape and place the sticky surface over each of the three
rectangular tape areas.

2. Peel the paper liner off the exposed sides of each piece of tape and press the stand on a flat surface until
it is secure.
Two screw-mount holes

Double-sided tape
areas (3 places)
(dimensions = 1” x 2”)

Figure 2-3 Mounting the Stand

 Installation 2-5

Mounting the Imager on the POS Stand

To mount the imager on the optional POS stand:

1. Mount the imager to the bracket assembly using the two mounting screws provided.

Figure 2-4 Mounting Imager on Bracket Assembly

2. Secure the microphone-style clip to the mounting surface using the two screws provided.

Figure 2-5 Securing Microphone Clip

2-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

3. Slide the bracket assembly with the imager attached onto the microphone-style clip.

Figure 2-6 Assembling the POS Stand

 Installation 2-7

Mounting the Imager on the MS320X Conversion Mounting Bracket

To mount the imager on an existing MS320X mounting bracket:

1. Remove the MS320X from its original mounting.

2. Mount the DS457 imager to the conversion mounting bracket using the two mounting screws provided.

3. Place the conversion bracket on top of the existing MS320X bracket, aligning the standoffs with the
existing mounting screws.

Figure 2-7 Replacing a Mounted MS320X with the DS457

2-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Connecting the DS457

USB Host Connection
1. Plug the 9-pin D-connector with the end marked SCANNER into the DS457.

2. If using an external switch and applicable host cable, plug the trigger cable into the female stereo
connector on the flying lead of the 9-pin D-connector. See Figure 2-10 on page 2-10 for connector pins.

3. Plug the host connector into the appropriate port on the host.

4. Check all connections to ensure they are secure.

5. Program the DS457 using the programming bar codes in this guide.

Host Connector

9-pin D-connector Trigger or Photo

Sensor (Optional)

Trigger Jack (Optional)

See Figure 2-10

Figure 2-8 USB Connection

 Installation 2-9

Serial Host Connection

1. Plug the 9-pin D-connector with the end marked SCANNER into the DS457. See Serial Interface Cable
Connection on page 2-10 to determine which cable to use.

2. If using an external switch and applicable host cable, plug the trigger cable into the female stereo
connector on the flying lead of the 9-pin D-connector. See Figure 2-10 on page 2-10 for connector pins.

3. Plug the host connector into the appropriate port on the host.

4. Plug the power supply into an AC receptacle, and the output cable from the power supply into the
connector near the host end of the interface cable.

5. Check all connections to ensure they are secure.

6. Program the DS457 using the programming bar codes in this guide.

Host Connector

Power Supply

9-pin D-connector

Trigger or Photo
Sensor (Optional)

Trigger Jack (Optional)

See Figure 2-10

Figure 2-9 Serial Connection

2 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Serial Interface Cable Connection

When connecting via RS-232, identify the type of host system to determine the cable needed. If you are unsure
what host system you are using, contact the local Zebra representative.

TTL Level Compatible RS-232 Host Systems

If using a PC, laptop, or POS terminal, the host system most likely has an RS-232 port which is compatible with
TTL levels. In this case, use the standard 5V RS-232 cable.

Host Systems Which Require True RS-232 Levels

Some host devices are not compatible with TTL level signals and require true RS-232 levels, such as those in
electrically noisy environments and locations with long cable runs. In such installations the DS457 may require
a level-shifting cable, such as p/n 25-62186-03R, to interface to this host system.

Failure to use the appropriate cable can impact the imager’s ability to reliably communicate with the host under
some conditions.

Trigger Jack Connector Pins

Male jack shown for reference

1 Insertion 1
Direction
2

2 3
3
Note: Due to many variations of 1 -1Ground
- Ground(Sleeve)
(Sleeve)
jack and socket styles, identify 2 -2Vcc (Middle
- Battery Contact)
(Middle Contact)
terminals as shown before 3 -3Trigger
- Trigger(Tip)
(Tip)
soldering leads.

Figure 2-10 Trigger Jack Connector Pins

Location and Positioning

The location and positioning guidelines do not consider unique application characteristics. Zebra recommends
that an opto-mechanical engineer perform an opto-mechanical analysis prior to integration.

NOTE Integrate the imager in an environment no more extreme than the product’s specification, where the
imager will not exceed its temperature range. For instance, do not mount the imager onto or next to a large
heat source. When placing the imager with another device, ensure there is proper convection or venting
for heat. Follow these suggestions to ensure product longevity, warranty, and overall satisfaction with the
imager.
 Installation 2 - 11

Embedded Applications Requiring a Window

Use the following guidelines for applications that require a window in front of the DS457.

NOTE Zebra does not recommend placing an exit window in front of the DS457; however, the following
information is provided for applications that require such a window.

Window Material
NOTE Consider the following window placement and material recommendations if mounting the DS457 within a
product with its own window.

Many window materials that look perfectly clear can contain stresses and distortions that can reduce imager
performance. For this reason, Zebra highly recommends optical glass or cell-cast acrylic. Following is a
description of acrylic and CR-39, another popular window material. Table 2-1 outlines the suggested
window properties.

CAUTION Consult an opto-mechanical engineer to recommend an appropriate window material and to

! determine if coatings are appropriate for the specific application.

NOTE Do not use polycarbonate material.

Acrylic (PMMA)
When fabricated by cell-casting, acrylic has very good optical quality and low initial cost. However, protect the
surface from the environment as acrylic is susceptible to attack by chemicals, mechanical stresses, and UV light.
Acrylic has reasonably good impact resistance and can be ultrasonically welded.

CR-39 (ADC)
CR-39 is a thermal-setting plastic produced by the cell-casting process, and is commonly used in plastic eye
glasses lenses. CR-39 has excellent chemical and environmental resistance, including good surface hardness.
Typically it does not require hard-coating, but can be hard coated for severe environments. CR-39 has
reasonably good impact resistance and cannot be ultrasonically welded.

Chemically Tempered Float Glass

Glass is a hard material which provides excellent scratch and abrasion resistance. However, unannealed glass
is brittle. Increasing flexibility strength with minimal optical distortion requires chemical tempering. Glass cannot
be ultrasonically welded and is difficult to cut into odd shapes.
2 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 2-1 Suggested Window Properties

Property Description

Material Clear cell-cast acrylic.

Spectral Transmission 85% minimum at 400 - 700 nm.

Thickness 0.059 ± 0.005

Wavefront Distortion (transmission) 0.2 wavelengths peak-to-valley maximum over any 0.08 in.
diameter within the clear aperture.

Clear Aperture To extend to within 0.04 in. of the edges all around.

Surface Quality 60-20 scratch/dig

Window Coatings
Table 2-3 lists some exit window manufacturers and anti-reflection coaters.

Anti-Reflection Coatings
Anti-reflection coatings can be used to achieve maximum working range and to improve the range of acceptable
window positions. However, they are expensive. AR coatings also have very poor abrasion and scratch
resistance, making only single-side AR coating practical (the AR coated side of the window faces the interior of
the imager).

Polysiloxane Coating
Apply polysiloxane type coatings to plastic surfaces to improve the surface resistance to both scratch and
abrasion. Typically, you apply these by dipping, then air-drying in an oven with filtered hot air.

Table 2-2 Taber Test Results on Common Exit Window Materials

Haze 100 Haze 500 Abrasion

Sample cycles cycles Resistance

Chemically Tempered Float Glass 1.20% 1.50% Best

PMMA with Polysiloxane Hardcoat 3% 10%

ADC 5% 30%

PMMA 30% Worst

* All measurements use a 100 gram load and CS-10F abraser.

 Installation 2 - 13

Table 2-3 Window Manufacturers and Coaters

Company Discipline Specifics

Evaporated Coatings, Inc. Anti-reflection coater Acrylic window supplier

2365 Maryland Road Anti-reflection coater
Willow Grove, PA 19090
(215) 659-3080

Fosta-Tek Optics, Inc. Cell-caster, hard coater, laser CR39 exit window
320 Hamilton Street cutter manufacturer
Leominster, MA 01453
(978) 534-6511

Optical Polymers Int. (OPI) CR-39 cell-caster, coater, CR39 exit window
110 West Main Street laser cutter manufacturer
Milford, CT 06460
(203) 882-9093

Polycast Acrylic cell-caster, hard coater, Acrylic exit window

70 Carlisle Place laser cutter manufacturer
Stamford, CT 06902
(800) 243-9002

TSP Acrylic cell-caster, coater, Acrylic exit window

2009 Glen Parkway laser cutter manufacturer
Batavia, OH 45103
(800) 277-9778

Embedded Window Angle and Position

If you are placing a window between the DS457 and the target, observe the following guidelines:
• Window Clear Opening - Make the clear opening of the window large enough so that the entire imager
clear aperture passes through the window. Cutting off any part of the clear aperture can degrade decode
range performance. Ensure that window placement relative to the DS457 accounts for tolerances on all
parts involved in that assembly.
• Window Angle - Minimum window tilt is indicated in Table 2-4 on page 2-15. Further tilting the window is
acceptable and decreases the possibility of a secondary reflection from that window degrading the
imager's performance.
• Minimum Window Distance - 5 mm.
• Optical Working Range - Adding a window can reduce the working range of the imager since there is a
signal loss when passing through window material. To minimize this reduction, use a special coating
described in Window Coatings on page 2-12. To understand the difference, test the imager in the desired
orientation and see if the difference affects imager performance.
2 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Notes:
1. Imaging axis pointing tolerance vs. datums ABC:
± 4º horizontal; ± 3º vertical
2. Clipping the imager clear aperture is not permitted.
3. Dimensions are in mm.
4. User mounting tolerances are not included.

Figure 2-11 DS457 Optical Path and Exit Window

 Installation 2 - 15

Recommended Exit Window Information

Note: Minimum external window distance

b = 5 mm (see Table 2-4).

Figure 2-12 Window Distances

Table 2-4 Recommended Exit Window Information - Tilted Window

External Window Specification Minimum Window Angle

Non-coated, minimum window positive tilt (+c) 31o

Non-coated, minimum window negative tilt (-c) 31o

AR coated, one side, minimum window positive tilt (+c) 26o

AR coated, one side, minimum window negative tilt (-c) 27o

AR coated, two sides, minimum window positive tilt (+c) 23o

AR coated, two sides, minimum window negative tilt (-c) 17o

Exit Window Notes

• Integration tolerances are not included.
• Ensure the window size is large enough to cover the engine clear aperture specified in Figure 2-11 plus
mounting tolerances of the window relative to the engine.
2 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Accessories
Zebra offers the following accessories for the imager. Refer to Solution Builder (ordering guide).

Table 2-5 DS457 Imager Accessories

Accessory Part Number

Power Supplies (RS-232)*

5 VDC 850 mA; US, Canada, Mexico, Japan, Taiwan PWRS-14000-253R

5 VDC 850 mA; EU, UK, EMEA, Russia, South Africa PWRS-14000-256R

5 VDC 850 mA; China PWRS-14000-257R

5 VDC 850 mA; Australia, Hong Kong, New Zealand PWRS-14000-258R

5 VDC 850 mA; Argentina, Uruguay PWRS-14000-259R

RS-232

9-Pin female (DB9) with straight connector, 6 ft, with trigger jack, no beeper 25-13227-03R

9-Pin female (DB9) with straight connector, 6 ft, with trigger jack and beeper 25-13228-03R

9-Pin female (DB9) with straight connector, 6 ft, no trigger jack or beeper 25-58918-02R

9-Pin female (DB9) coiled, 9 ft, no trigger jack or beeper 25-58918-03R

9-Pin female (DB9) with straight connector, 6 ft, with trigger jack and no hardware 25-63736-02R
handshaking

TTL RS-232 to true RS-232 conversion cable, low profile connector 25-62186-03R

USB

9-Pin female (DB9) with straight connector, 6 ft, with trigger jack and beeper 25-58925-02R

9-Pin female (DB9) with straight connector, 6 ft, no trigger jack or beeper 25-58926-04R

9-Pin female (DB9), 18 in, no trigger jack or beeper (for kiosks) 25-58926-05R

9-Pin female (DB9), coiled, 9 ft, no trigger jack or beeper 25-58926-06R

Optional Accessories

Push button trigger cable 25-04950-01R

Photo sensor trigger cable (retroreflective, IR 850nm, 7 foot range) 25-13176-01R

Gooseneck stand (twilight black) 20-60136-02R

POS wall/counter mount KT-145344-01

MS320x to DS457 conversion mounting bracket KT-152342-01

*Standalone power supply is not used for USB hosts.

 Installation 2 - 17

Simple Serial Interface Software Developer's Kit (SSI SDK)

The SSI Software Developer's Kit, available on Zebra’s website, provides the software tools used to integrate
and communicate with the DS457 imagers via RS-232, including:

• Sample Windows® program with source code

• DLL with source code for building user applications
• ActiveX component (including help file) for easy integration into VisualBasic programs
• Simple Serial Interface documentation.
With over 70 programmable parameters, you can configure DS457 imagers using bar code menus, or through
the serial interface using Zebra’s Simple Serial Interface protocol.
For Windows®, DOS, and embedded system environments, this enables you to take full advantage of the
imager’s features and obtain maximum performance.
To download the SDK, go to: http://www.zebra.com/support.

Zebra SNAPI Software Developer's Kit

The Symbol Native Application Programming Interface Software Development Kit (SNAPI SDK) facilitates
communicate with SNAPI-based Zebra scanners over USB, providing the following features:

• Bar code capture and decode

• Image and video capture
• Electronic scanner configuration and software update
• Reference sample application in Microsoft Visual C#® .NET.
To download the SDK, go to: http://www.zebra.com/support.
2 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
CHAPTER 3 IMAGING

Overview
This chapter provides information on aiming, illumination, data capture, beeper and decode LED feedback,
supported symbologies, and operating modes.

Imaging System
Aiming Pattern
A 655 nm laser and a pattern forming element generate a laser aiming pattern which represents the imager's
field of view throughout its entire depth of field. The pattern's center dot indicates the center of the field of view.

Figure 3-1 Aiming Pattern

The bright center spot provides visibility for aiming in sunlight and other bright light applications. The aiming
pattern indicates the field of view for capturing images. The ends of the horizontal and vertical lines represent
the midpoints of the sides of an imaginary box outlining the capture field.

Aiming Error
The aiming pattern is rotated by 2o relative to the imaging axis in the horizontal plane to minimize parallax
between the aiming axis and the imaging axis at 190 mm (7.5 in.) from the imager.
3-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Aiming Control
The DS457 can capture images with both the aiming subsystem turned on during exposure (the image of the
aiming pattern is visible in the digital image) or off. If the aiming system is turned off during exposure,
brightness of the aiming pattern decreases as exposure increases.

Illumination System
The illumination system consists of two high-output, red LEDs (625 nm) and a sophisticated drive system that
allows image capture and decoding throughout a full range of lighting conditions (total darkness to full
sunlight).

Illumination Control
The DS457 can capture images with the illumination subsystem turned on or off, accommodating images that
are close to the wavelength of the illumination. For example, since the imager uses red LED illumination, it may
be desirable to shut off the illumination when capturing an image printed in red ink.

It is recommended to turn off LED illumination and provide minimum 30 fcd ambient light on the document
surface when taking images of documents. Even a small amount of dust or fingerprints on the imager window
can scatter the LED illumination and create glare in the image. The glare reduces quality of document images
but does not affect bar code reading.

Frame Rate Control

The DS457 outputs images at 60 frames per second by default. When capturing images, use lower frame rates
to increase image brightness. The aiming pattern and illumination appear to blink when the frame rate is 30 fps
or lower.
 Imaging 3-3

Capturing Data
When scanning, the imager projects a red laser aiming pattern which allows positioning the bar code within its
field of view. See Decode Zones on page 4-6 for the proper distance to achieve between the imager and a bar
code. The imager turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code.

In Presentation Mode (default), when the DS457 detects an object in its field of view, it automatically triggers
and displays the aiming pattern. In triggered mode, press the trigger button on top of the imager to display the
aiming pattern.

To scan a bar code, center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern. Be sure the entire symbol is
within the rectangular area formed by the cross pattern.
1D bar code symbol 2D bar code symbol 2D dot peen DPM symbol

Figure 3-2 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Pattern

The imager can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered. The top examples
in Figure 3-3 show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.

012345 012345

012345 012345

Figure 3-3 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming

Upon successful decode, the DS457 beeps and its feedback LED turns green.
3-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Beeper and Decode LED Indications

Table 3-1 provides beeper and LED indications related to certain events. The LED illuminates red to indicate
that the imager has power. SSI events are also listed.

Table 3-1 User Interface Indications

Indication
Description SSI Event
Beeper Power/Decode LED

Trigger pull No sound Red TRIGGER_PULLED

No decode NODECODE_MSG

Wakeup WAKEUP

Video is off VIDEO_OFF

Video is on VIDEO_ON

Decode Middle Tone Flash of green DECODE

Snapshot started Low Tone Blinking green SNAPSHOT_START

Snapshot is complete Low Tone Red SNAPSHOT_COMPLETE

Bootup Low Tone, Middle Red BOOTUP

Tone, High Tone

Transmission error Four Low Tones Red TRANSMIT_ERROR

Entry error Low Tone, High Tone Flash of green ENTRY_ERROR

Defaults set High Tone, Low Tone, Flash of green DEFAULTS_SET

High Tone, Low Tone
Parameter entered PARAM_ENTERED

Number entry expected High Tone, Low Tone Flash of green NUMBER_EXPECTED
 Imaging 3-5

Supported Symbologies
The following bar code types are supported and can be individually enabled or disabled:

1D Symbologies 2D Symbologies

UPC/EAN PDF417
Bookland EAN MicroPDF417
UCC Coupon Code Data Matrix
ISSN EAN Data Matrix Inverse
Code 128 Maxicode
GS1-128 QR Code
ISBT 128 MicroQR
Code 39 QR Inverse
Trioptic Code 39 Aztec
Code 32 Aztec Inverse
Code 93
Code 11 Postal Codes
Interleaved 2 of 5 US Postnet
Discrete 2 of 5 US Planet
Codabar UK Postal
MSI Japan Postal
Chinese 2 of 5 Australian Postal
Matrix 2 of 5 Netherlands KIX Code
Korean 3 of 5 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
Inverse 1D UPU FICS Postal
GS1 DataBar
Composite Codes

Operating Modes
The DS457 supports the following operating modes. See Operational Modes on page 7-4 for information on
changing between modes.

• Decode (default mode) - for decoding a bar code

• Snapshot - for capturing an image
• Snapshot with Viewfinder Mode - provides a video of the subject until a snapshot of the image is
captured.
• Video - provides a video of the subject
3-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
CHAPTER 4 SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical Interface

Figure 4-1 DS457 Connector

Table 4-1 lists the pin functions of the DS457 interface.

Table 4-1 DS457 USB and Serial Electrical Interface

USB Interface Serial Interface

Pin No. Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name

1 Trigger 1 Trigger

2 NC 2 TXD Output TTL Only

3 USB + 3 RXD Input TTL Only

4 Connect to Pin 8 4 NC

5 Ground 5 Ground

6 +5V Power 6 +5V Power

7 USB - 7 CTS Input TTL Only

8 Connect to Pin 4 8 RTS Output TTL Only

9 Beeper/Download 9 Beeper/Download

NC = No Connect (do not connect this pin)

4-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Dimension Drawings

29.2 mm

58.4 mm 62.0 mm

Back View

Figure 4-2 DS457 Dimension Drawings

 Specifications 4-3

DS457 Imager Technical Specifications

Table 4-2 DS457 Technical Specifications at 23° C

Item Description

Performance Characteristics

Sensor Resolution 752 x 480 pixels

Field of View DS457-SR/DL: 39.6º horizontal, 25.7º vertical

DS457-HD/DP: 38.4º horizontal, 24.9º vertical

Pitch/Skew/Roll Tolerance ± 60º / ± 60º / 360º (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-5)

Focal Distance from Front of Imager DS457-SR/DL: 4.7 in.

Housing DS457-HD/DP: 2.3 in.

Aiming Element (VLD) 655 nm ± 10 nm

Illumination Element 625 nm ± 5 nm (LED)

Minimum Print Contrast 25% absolute dark/light reflectance

User Environment

Power Requirements
Supply Voltage 5.00 V ± 0.5 V
Low Power / Suspend Current
Draw 2.5 mA (typical)
Idle Current 160 mA (typical)
Operating Current
(scan/decode session) 280 mA (average)
Peak Current 450 mA

Ambient Light Immunity Total darkness to 9,000 ft. candles (96,900 lux)

Humidity
Operating 95% RH, non-condensing at 50º C
Storage 85% RH, non-condensing at 70º C

Drop Rating Unit functions normally after multiple 30 in (76 cm) drops to tile over
concrete

Temperature
Operating -4º to 122º F (-20º to 50º C)*
Storage -40º to 158º F (-40º to 70º C)
* Above 45ºC the laser aimer is disabled. In high temperature
environments the DS457 safeguards the laser from overheating by
monitoring the internal system temperature. For this reason, if Time
Delay to Presentation Idle Mode is set to a high value and the aiming
pattern remains on for an extended period of time while in
presentation mode, the imager may temporarily shut off the aiming
pattern.

Note: Environmental and/or tolerance parameters are not cumulative. Perform a thermal analysis
if the application is subject to an extreme temperature environment.
4-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 4-2 DS457 Technical Specifications at 23° C (Continued)

Item Description

Dimensions 1.15 in. (29.2 mm) H x 2.30 in. (58.4 mm) W x 2.44 in. (62.0 mm) D

Weight 3.9 oz. (111.0 grams)

Interface 9-pin male D-sub supports USB (full speed) and TTL level RS-232
with RTS and CTS

Note: Environmental and/or tolerance parameters are not cumulative. Perform a thermal analysis
if the application is subject to an extreme temperature environment.
 Specifications 4-5

Skew, Pitch and Roll

Measured on a 20 mil Code 39 symbol at a distance of 10 inches. Tolerance is reduced at extreme ends of the
working range.

Skew Pitch
+ 60° from normal
+ 50° from normal

Roll

360°

Note: Tolerances are

reduced at extreme ends
of the working range.

Figure 4-3 Skew, Pitch and Roll

4-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Decode Zones
DS457-SR/DL
Figure 4-4 shows the decode zone for the DS457-SR/DL. Typical values appear. Table 4-3 lists the typical and
guaranteed distances for selected bar code densities. The minimum element width (or “symbol density”) is the
width in mils of the narrowest element (bar or space) in the symbol.

Note: Typical performance at 73˚F (23˚C) in. cm

on high quality symbols. 20 50.8
W
i
d
10 25.4 t
h

o
DS457-SR/DL 0 0 f

F
7.5 mil Data Matrix i
10 25.4
2.0 6.0 e
l
5 mil Code 39 d
1.3 8.1
10 mil Data Matrix 20 50.8
1.5 8.4

15 mil Data Matrix

1.6 10.9

13 mil (100% UPC)

1.5 15.3

20 mil Code 39
1.8 16.5

In. 0 4 8 12 16 20
cm 0 10.2 20.3 30.5 40.6 50.8

Depth of Field
Figure 4-4 DS457-SR/DL Decode Zone - 1D and Data Matrix Symbols
 Specifications 4-7

Note: Typical performance at 73˚F (23˚C) in. cm

on high quality symbols. 20 50.8
W
i
d
10 25.4 t
h

o
DS457-SR/DL 0 0 f

F
7.5 mil QR Code i
10 25.4
2.1 5.1 e
5 mil PDF417
l
2.4 6.2 d

10 mil QR Code 20 50.8

1.5 7.0

6.67 mil PDF417

1.8 7.1

10 mil PDF417
1.2 10.2

15 mil PDF417
1.5 13.0

In. 0 4 8 12 16
cm 0 10.2 20.3 30.5 40.6

Depth of Field
Figure 4-5 DS457-SR/DL Decode Zone - QR Code and PDF417 Symbols
4-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 4-3 DS457-SR/DL Decode Distances (Presentation Mode with No Motion Enhancement)

Guaranteed Working
Typical Working Ranges
Symbol Density/ Ranges
Bar Code Type
Near Far Near Far

5.0 mil 1.3 in 8.1 in 1.6 in 6.3 in

Code 39 3.30 cm 20.57 cm 4.06 cm 16.00 cm

20 mil 1.8 in 16.5 in Note 1 11.6 in

Code 39 4.57 cm 41.91 cm 29.46 cm

13 mil 1.5 in 15.3 in 2.1 in 9.5 in

100% UPC 3.81 cm 38.86 cm 5.33 cm 24.13 cm

7.5 mil 2.0 in 6.0 in N/A N/A

Data Matrix 5.08 cm 15.24 cm

10 mil 1.5 in 8.4 in N/A N/A

Data Matrix 3.81 cm 21.34 cm

15 mil 1.6 in 10.9 in N/A N/A

Data Matrix 4.06 cm 27.69 cm

7.5 mil 2.1 in 5.1 in N/A N/A

QR Code 5.33 cm 12.95 cm

10 mil 1.5 in 7.0 in N/A N/A

QR Code 3.81 cm 17.78 cm

5.0 mil 2.4 in 6.2 in 3.1 in 3.5 in

PDF417 6.10 cm 15.75 cm 7.87 cm 8.89 cm

6.67 mil 1.8 in 7.1 in 2.1 in 5.8 in

PDF417 4.57 cm 18.03 cm 5.33 cm 14.73 cm

10 mil 1.2 in 10.2 in Note 1 7.6 in

PDF417 3.05 cm 25.91 cm 19.30 cm

15 mil 1.5 in 13.0 in Note 1 10.1 in

PDF417 3.81 cm 33.02 cm 25.65 cm

Notes:
1. Near distances are field-of-view (FOV) limited.
2. Contrast is measured as Mean Reflective Difference (MRD) at 670 nm.
3. Working range specifications at temperature = 23°C, pitch=18°, roll=0°,
skew=0°, photographic quality, humidity 45-70% RH.
4. Enabling Motion Enhancement reduces decode ranges.
 Specifications 4-9

DS457-HD/DP
Figure 4-6 shows the decode zone for the DS457-HD/DP. Typical values appear. Table 4-4 lists the typical and
guaranteed distances for selected bar code densities. The minimum element width (or “symbol density”) is the
width in mils of the narrowest element (bar or space) in the symbol.
Note: Typical performance at 73˚F (23˚C) in. cm
on high quality symbols. 10 25.4
W
i
d
5 12.7 t
h

o
DS457-HD/DP 0 0 f

F
4 mil Data Matrix i
5 12.7
1.6 3.0 e
3 mil Code 128
l
1.4 3.5 d
5 mil Data Matrix 10 25.4
1.4 3.7

7.5 mil Data Matrix

1.2 4.4

3 mil Code 39
1.2 4.8

5 mil Code 39
1.1 5.7

13 mil (100% UPC)

1.7 8.3
15 mil Code 128
3.1 8.7
20 mil Code 39
1.9 9.7

In. 0 2 4 6 8 10
cm 0 5.1 10.2 15.2 20.3 25.4

Depth of Field

Figure 4-6 DS457-HD/DP Decode Zone - 1D and Data Matrix Symbols

4 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Note: Typical performance at 73˚F (23˚C) in. cm

on high quality symbols. 10 25.4
W
i
d
5 12.7 t
h

o
DS457-HD/DP 0 0 f

F
i
5 12.7
e
5 mil QR Code l
1.5 3.1 d
4 mil PDF417 10 25.4
1.4 3.8

7.5 mil QR Code

1.1 4.0

10 mil QR Code
1.1 4.6

6.67 mil PDF417

1.0 4.8

20 mil QR Code
1.4 6.8
40 mil QR Code
3.0 10.4

In. 0 2 4 6 8 10
cm 0 5.1 10.2 15.2 20.3 25.4

Depth of Field

Figure 4-7 DS457-HD/DP Decode Zone - QR Code and PDF417 Symbols

 Specifications 4 - 11

Table 4-4 DS457-HD/DP Decode Distances (Presentation Mode with No Motion Enhancement)

Guaranteed Working
Typical Working Ranges
Symbol Density/ Ranges
Bar Code Type
Near Far Near Far

3.0 mil 1.2 in 4.8 in 1.4 in 3.0 in

Code 39 3.05 cm 12.19 cm 3.56 cm 7.62 cm

5.0 mil 1.1 in 5.7 in Note 1 4.1 in

Code 39 2.79 cm 14.48 cm 10.41 cm

20 mil 1.9 in 9.7 in Note 1 9.3 in

Code 39 4.83 cm 24.64 cm 23.62 cm

3.0 mil 1.4 in 3.5 in N/A N/A

Code 128 3.56 cm 8.89 cm

15.0 mil 3.1 in 8.7 in N/A N/A

Code 128 7.87 cm 22.10 cm

13 mil 1.7 in 8.3 in 2.1 in 5.7 in

100% UPC 4.32 cm 21.08 cm 5.33 cm 14.48 cm

4 mil 1.6 in 3.0 in N/A N/A

Data Matrix 4.06 cm 7.62 cm

5 mil 1.4 in 3.7 in N/A N/A

Data Matrix 3.56 cm 9.40 cm

7.5 mil 1.2 in 4.4 in N/A N/A

Data Matrix 3.05 cm 11.18 cm

5 mil 1.5 in 3.1 in N/A N/A

QR Code 3.81 cm 7.87 cm

7.5 mil 1.1 in 4.0 in N/A N/A

QR Code 2.79 cm 10.16 cm

10 mil 1.1 in 4.6 in N/A N/A

QR Code 2.79 cm 11.68 cm

20 mil 1.4 in 6.8 in N/A N/A

QR Code 3.56 cm 17.27 cm

Notes:
1. Near distances are FOV limited.
2. Contrast is measured as Mean Reflective Difference (MRD) at 670 nm.
3. Working range specifications at temperature = 23°C, pitch=18°, roll=0°,
skew=0°, photographic quality, humidity 45-70% RH.
4. Enabling Motion Enhancement reduces decode ranges.
4 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 4-4 DS457-HD/DP Decode Distances (Presentation Mode with No Motion Enhancement) (Continued)

Guaranteed Working
Typical Working Ranges
Symbol Density/ Ranges
Bar Code Type
Near Far Near Far

40 mil 3.0 in 10.4 in N/A N/A

QR Code 7.62 cm 26.42 cm

4.0 mil 1.4 in 3.8 in 1.6 in 2.7 in

PDF417 3.56 cm 9.65 cm 4.06 cm 6.86 cm

6.67 mil 1.0 in 4.8 in 1.1 in 3.6 in

PDF417 2.54 cm 12.19 cm 2.79 cm 9.14 cm

Notes:
1. Near distances are FOV limited.
2. Contrast is measured as Mean Reflective Difference (MRD) at 670 nm.
3. Working range specifications at temperature = 23°C, pitch=18°, roll=0°,
skew=0°, photographic quality, humidity 45-70% RH.
4. Enabling Motion Enhancement reduces decode ranges.
CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE &
TROUBLESHOOTING

Overview
The chapter provides information on maintenance and troubleshooting.

Maintenance
Clean the imager housing and exit window with a damp cloth and, if necessary, a non-ammonia based
detergent. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the exit window.

Cleaning the Connector

1. Remove the cable connector from the imager.

2. Rub a cotton-tipped applicator dipped in isopropyl alcohol back and forth across the connector pins. Do not
leave any cotton residue on the connector.

3. Rub a dry cotton-tipped applicator back and forth across the connector pins.

4. Spray compressed air on the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle about ½ inch away from the
surface.

5. Inspect the area for any grease or dirt and repeat if required.

CAUTION Do not get excess alcohol onto the soft elastomeric gasket since this can compromise the adhesion to
the housing and ultimately the gasket’s ability to prevent liquids from entering the imager in this area
during normal operation.
5-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions

No red LED or nothing No power to the imager. Check the system power.
happens during a Confirm that the correct host interface cable is
capture attempt. used.

Connect the power supply.

Re-connect loose cables.

Imager cannot read the Interface/power cables are Re-connect loose cables.
bar code. loose.

Imager is not programmed for Program the imager to read the type of bar code
the correct bar code type. to be decoded.

Incorrect communication Set the correct communication parameters

parameters. (baud rate, parity, stop bits, etc.)

Bar code symbol is Ensure the symbol is not defaced.

unreadable. Try capturing similar symbols of the same code
type.

Aiming pattern does not Hot environment. Remove the imager from the hot environment,
appear. and allow it to cool down.

Laser activates, followed Beeper is configured. See Beeper and Decode LED Indications on
by a beep sequence. page 3-4 for beeper indication descriptions.

NOTE If after performing these checks the symbol still does not decode, contact the distributor or contact Zebra
Global Customer Support. See page xviii for contact information.
CHAPTER 6 USER PREFERENCES

Introduction
This chapter describes each user preference feature and provides the programming bar codes necessary for
selecting these features.

Host Selection
The default serial host is SSI and the default USB host is HID Keyboard Emulation, as these host types provide
more flexibility during integration when configuring the unit via host command. Selecting other host
configurations requires scanning bar code menus and cannot be performed via host programming. See each
host chapter for configuration options for each host type.

NOTE The DS457 automatically switches between USB and serial host interfaces based on the type of cable
attached.

NOTE Selecting one of the Serial Host Types on page 9-5 disables SSI support. To restore SSI support, scan
SSI Host on page 8-9.

Phantom Scan Session

The Phantom Scan Session feature places the system into a known state for two seconds immediately after
the power-up beep sequence in order to decode a parameter bar code without intervention and regardless of
existing settings and mode. This allows you to scan a Set Defaults or other parameter bar code without
triggering the imager or initiating a host scan session in order to return an unresponsive system to its factory
default settings. Aim and illumination are turned off and Phantom Scan exits upon a trigger event, host
command, or successful decode.
6-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Changing Default Values

The imager ships with the settings shown in the Table 6-1 on page 6-3 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default
Parameters for all host and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not
necessary.

There are two ways to change a parameter value:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in
memory.
• For SSI and USB SNAPI hosts, send a “parameter send” command from the host system. Hexadecimal
parameter numbers appear in this chapter below the parameter title, and options appear in parenthesis
beneath the accompanying bar codes. See the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s Guide for
detailed instructions for changing parameter values using this method.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.

To return all features to default values, scan *Restore Defaults on page 6-5. Throughout the programming bar
code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

* Indicates default
*High Volume Feature/Option
(0)
Option decimal value for
programming

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high,
scan the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 6-9. The imager issues a
fast warble beep signal and a good decode LED signal, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters, such as Decode Session Timeout, require scanning several bar codes. See these
parameter descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
 User Preferences 6-3

User Preferences Parameter Defaults

Table 6-1 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. To change any parameter value, scan the appropriate
bar code(s) provided in the User Preferences section beginning on page 6-5.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 6-1 User Preferences Default Table

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Number Number Number

User Preferences

Set Default Parameter Restore Defaults 6-5

Parameter Scanning 236 ECh Enable 6-6

User Parameter Pass Through 625 F1h 71h Disable 6-7

Beep After Good Decode 56 38h Enable 6-8

Beeper Tone 145 91h Medium 6-9

Beeper Volume 140 8Ch High 6-10

Suppress Power-up Beeps 721 F1h D1h Do not suppress 6-10

Trigger Mode 138 8Ah Presentation 6-11

Presentation Performance Mode 650 F1h 8Ah Standard 6-12

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode 663 F1h 97h 1 Minute 6-13

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode 662 F1h 96h 1 Minute 6-15

Power Mode 128 80h Low Power 6-17

Time Delay to Low Power Mode 146 92h 1.0 Sec 6-17

Picklist Mode 402 F0h 92h Disabled Always 6-19

Decode Session Timeout 136 88h 9.9 Sec 6-19

Timeout Between Decodes, 137 89h 0.6 Sec 6-20

Same Symbol

Continuous Bar Code Read 649 F1h 89h Disable 6-20

Unique Bar Code Reporting 723 F1h D3h Enable 6-21

Mirrored Image 624 F1h 70h Disable 6-21

Mobile Phone/Display Mode 716 F1h CCh Disable 6-22

Validate Concatenated Parameter Bar 692 F1h B4h Disable 6-22

Codes

PDF Prioritization 719 F1h CFh Disable 6-23

6-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 6-1 User Preferences Default Table

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Number Number Number

PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 F1h D0h 400 ms 6-23

Multicode Mode 677 F1h A5h Disable 6-24

Multicode Expression 661 F1h 95h 1 6-25

Multicode Mode Concatenation 717 F1h, CDh Disable 6-33

Multicode Concatenation Symbology 722 F1h, D2h Concatenate as 6-34

PDF417

Miscellaneous Parameters

Transmit Code ID Character 45 2Dh None 6-37

SSI Prefix Value 105 69h <CR> 6-38

SSI Suffix 1 Value 104 68h <CR> 6-38

SSI Suffix 2 Value 106 6Ah <CR>

Non-SSI Prefix Value 99, 105 63h, 69h <CR><LF> 6-38

Non-SSI Suffix 1 Value 98, 104 62h, 68h <CR><LF> 6-38

Non-SSI Suffix 2 Value 100, 106 64h, 6Ah <CR><LF>

Scan Data Transmission Format 235 EBh Data as is 6-39

FN1 Substitution Values 103, 109 67h, 6Dh Set 6-40

Transmit “No Read” Message 94 5Eh Disable 6-41

Report Version 6-41

 User Preferences 6-5

User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
You can reset the DS457 to two types of defaults: factory defaults or custom defaults. Scan the appropriate bar
code below to reset the imager to its default settings and/or set its current settings as custom defaults.

• Restore Defaults - Scan this bar code to reset all default parameters as follows.
• If you previously set custom defaults by scanning Write to Custom Defaults, scan Restore Defaults
to retrieve and restore the imager’s custom default settings.
• If you did not set custom defaults, scan Restore Defaults to restore the factory default values listed in
Table A-1.
• Set Factory Defaults - Scan this bar code to restore the factory default values listed in Table A-1. This
deletes any custom defaults set.
• Write to Custom Defaults - Scan this bar code to set the current imager settings as custom defaults.
Once set, you can recover custom default settings by scanning Restore Defaults.

*Restore Defaults

Set Factory Defaults

Write to Custom Defaults

6-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Parameter Scanning
Parameter # 236 (SSI # ECh)
To disable the decoding of parameter bar codes, including the Set Defaults parameter bar codes, scan the
Disable Parameter Scanning bar code below. To enable decoding of parameter bar codes, scan Enable
Parameter Scanning.

*Enable Parameter Scanning

(1)

Disable Parameter Scanning

(0)
 User Preferences 6-7

User Parameter Pass Through

Parameter # 625 (SSI # F1h 71h)
Enable this to send user-defined parameter bar codes (see User-Defined Parameter Bar Code Format) as
normal decode data in decode data packets for SSI and SNAPI hosts (see Decode Data Format).

User-Defined Parameter Bar Code Format

Code 128 bar codes with:

<FNC3><L><data>

or

<FNC3><B><12 bytes of data>

Decode Data Format

<0xf3><L><data>

or

<0xf3><B><12 bytes of data>

Note that the B type only works with 12 bytes of data.

A normal decode beep sounds upon a successful decode of a user-defined parameter bar code.

Enable User Parameter Pass Through

(1)

*Disable User Parameter Pass Through

(0)
6-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Beep After Good Decode

Parameter # 56 (SSI # 38h)
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the imager issues a beep signal after a good decode. If
selecting Do Not Beep After Good Decode, beeper signals still occur during parameter menu scanning and
to indicate error conditions.

*Beep After Good Decode

(Enable)
(1)

Do Not Beep After Good Decode

(Disable)
(0)
 User Preferences 6-9

Beeper Tone
Parameter # 145 (SSI # 91h)
To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan the Low Frequency, Medium Frequency, or High
Frequency bar code.

Low Frequency
(2)

*Medium Frequency
(Optimum Setting)
(1)

High Frequency
(0)
6 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Beeper Volume
Parameter # 140 (SSI # 8Ch)
To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume, or High Volume bar code.

Low Volume
(2)

Medium Volume
(1)

*High Volume
(0)

Suppress Power-up Beeps

Parameter # 721 (SSI # F1h D1h)
Select whether or not to suppress the imager’s power-up beeps.

* Do Not Suppress Power-up Beeps

(0)

Suppress Power-up Beeps

(1)
 User Preferences 6 - 11

Trigger Mode
Parameter # 138 (SSI # 8Ah)
• Level - A trigger event activates decode processing, which continues until the trigger event ends, a valid
decode, or the decode session time-out occurs.
• Presentation Mode - When the DS457 detects an object in its field of view, it triggers and attempts to
decode. The range of object detection does not vary under normal lighting conditions. This applies to
decode mode only. In this mode the unit does not enter Low Power mode.
• Host - A host command issues the triggering signal. The DS457 interprets a trigger pull as a level
triggering option.
• Software Trigger Only Mode - This option disables the hardware trigger so that only a host command
can issue the triggering signal. This is interpreted as a level trigger option.

Level
(0)

*Presentation Mode
(7)

Host
(8)

Software Trigger Only Mode

(15)
6 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Presentation Performance Mode

Parameter # 650 (SSI # F1h 8Ah)
Select one of the following Presentation Performance Mode options:

• Standard Presentation Mode is optimized for general purpose scanning, i.e., reading bar codes from
standard surfaces such as paper labels or hang tags. This mode balances bar code swipe speed (the
speed a bar code can pass through the field of view and still be read) and decode range (distance
between the imager and the bar code) for optimal performance on standard paper-based bar codes.
• Enhanced Presentation Mode is also optimized for general purpose (paper-based) scanning but
provides for a faster bar code swipe speed and shorter decode range than Standard Presentation Mode.
This mode is recommended for applications requiring the highest bar code swipe speed (e.g., automated
scanning) or a reduced decode range (e.g., to better match EAS deactivation range or reduce the
occurrence of inadvertent reads during hands-free operation).
• Traditional Presentation Mode is optimized for applications that require frequent reading of bar codes
from mobile phones or PC displays, and improves performance on large 2D symbols. This mode allows
more time for the imager to analyze each bar code, improving performance on challenging bar codes
such as those on a mobile phone display where the backlight has dimmed. This mode is also
recommended for applications that include many truncated or poor quality bar codes. Because swipe
speed is reduced, present bar codes to the imager rather than swiping them when using this mode.

NOTE To scan bar codes from mobile phones or PC displays, you must enable Mobile Phone/Display Mode
on page 6-22.

*Standard Presentation Mode

(2)

Enhanced Presentation Mode

(0)

Traditional Presentation Mode

(3)
 User Preferences 6 - 13

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode

Parameter # 663 (SSI # F1h 97h)
In Presentation Mode, this parameter sets the time the imager remains active before entering idle mode with
dim illumination. The imager wakes upon presentation of a bar code or a trigger pull.

Disable
(0)

1 Second
(1)

10 Seconds
(10)

*1 Minute
(17)

5 Minutes
(21)

15 Minutes
(27)
6 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode (continued)

30 Minutes
(29)

45 Minutes
(30)

1 Hour
(33)

3 Hours
(35)

6 Hours
(38)

9 Hours
(41)
 User Preferences 6 - 15

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode

Parameter # 662 (SSI # F1h 96h)
In Presentation Mode, this parameter sets the time the imager remains active before entering sleep mode with
no illumination. The imager wakes when it senses motion, upon presentation of a bar code, or a trigger pull.

NOTE Imager performance is not guaranteed in dim conditions.

Disable
(0)

1 Second
(1)

10 Seconds
(10)

*1 Minute
(17)

5 Minutes
(21)
6 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode (continued)

15 Minutes
(27)

30 Minutes
(29)

45 Minutes
(30)

1 Hour
(33)

3 Hours
(35)

6 Hours
(38)

9 Hours
(41)
 User Preferences 6 - 17

Power Mode (RS-232 Hosts Only)

Parameter # 128 (SSI # 80h)
Select whether or not the imager enters Low Power consumption mode after a decode attempt. In Continuous
On mode, the imager does not enter this low power state.

Continuous On
(0)

*Low Power Mode

(1)

Time Delay to Low Power Mode

Parameter # 146 (SSI # 92h)
This parameter sets the time the imager remains active after decoding. After a scan session, the imager waits
this amount of time before entering Low Power mode.

NOTE This parameter only applies when Power Mode is set to Low Power.
To program a different value for this parameter than those provided here, see Using Time Delay to Low
Power Mode with SSI on page 8-7.

*1 Second
(17)

5 Seconds
(21)
6 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)

1 Minute
(33)

5 Minutes
(37)

15 Minutes
(43)

1 Hour
(49)
 User Preferences 6 - 19

Picklist Mode
Parameter # 402 (SSI # F0h 92h)
Picklist mode enables the imager to decode only bar codes aligned under the center of the laser aiming
pattern. Select one of the following picklist modes:

• Disabled Always - Picklist mode is always disabled.

• Enabled Always - Picklist mode is always enabled.
NOTE With Picklist Mode enabled, the decode aiming pattern turns on even when the Decode Aiming Pattern on
page 7-6 is disabled.

Picklist mode does not apply to OCR reading.

*Disabled Always
(0)

Enabled Always
(2)

Decode Session Timeout

Parameter # 136 (SSI # 88h)
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is
programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.

To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix
D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Provide a leading zero for single digit numbers.
For example, to set a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the 0 and
5 bar codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.

Decode Session Timeout

6 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol

Parameter # 137 (SSI # 89h)
Use this option in presentation mode to prevent multiple reads of a symbol left in the DS457’s field of view. The
timeout begins when you remove the symbol from the field of view.

To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, available in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to
9.9 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes
that correspond to the desired interval. The default interval is 0.6 seconds.

Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol

Continuous Bar Code Read

Parameter # 649 (SSI # F1h 89h)
Select Enable to allow decode processing to continue until the trigger event ends or the decode session
time-out occurs. User indications occur upon decoding each bar code. Select Disable to end decode
processing upon a valid decode as well. This mode does not apply to presentation mode.

NOTE Zebra strongly recommends enabling Picklist Mode on page 6-19 with this feature. Disabling Picklist
Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one bar code is in the imaging engine's field of view.

*Disable Continuous Bar Code Read

(0)

Enable Continuous Bar Code Read

(1)
 User Preferences 6 - 21

Unique Bar Code Reporting

Parameter # 723 (SSI # F1h D3h)
Enable this to report only unique bar codes while the trigger is pressed. This option only applies when
Continuous Bar Code Read is enabled.

Disable Unique Bar Code Reporting

(0)

*Enable Unique Bar Code Reporting

(1)

Mirrored Image
Parameter # 624 (SSI # F1h 70h)
Enable this to scan images in reverse, or mirrored, as if seen through a mirror. This mode is useful in
applications requiring scanning through a mirror and using symbologies that do not decode in reverse.

Enabling this mode when using snapshot, video, or video viewfinder modes transmits images as mirrored
images.

*Disable Mirrored Image

(0)

Enable Mirrored Image

(1)
6 - 22 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Mobile Phone/Display Mode

Parameter # 716 (SSI # F1h CCh)
This mode improves bar code reading performance with target bar codes displayed on mobile phones and
electronic displays.

*Disable Mobile Phone/Display Mode

(0)

Enable Mobile Phone/Display Mode

(3)

Validate Concatenated Parameter Bar Codes

Parameter # 692 (SSI # F1h B4h)
The imager can encounter invalid parameters when using concatenated parameter bar codes intended for
different imager models or different versions of an imager. This parameter determines how to process
concatenated parameter bar codes when the imager encounters an invalid parameter setting in the bar code.

Disable this to ignore invalid parameters and configure valid parameters. Enable this to ignore all parameters if
one or more are invalid.

*Disable Validate Concatenated Parameter Bar Codes

(0)

Enable Validate Concatenated Parameter Bar Codes

(1)
 User Preferences 6 - 23

PDF Prioritization
Parameter # 719 (SSI # F1h CFh)
Enable this feature to delay decoding a 1D bar code (Code 128 of 8 to 25 characters length) by the value
specified in PDF Prioritization Timeout. During that time the imager attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol
(e.g., on a US driver's license), and if successful reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417
symbol, it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device’s field of view for the
imager to report it. This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.

*Disable PDF Prioritization

(0)

Enable PDF Prioritization

(1)

PDF Prioritization Timeout

Parameter # 720 (SSI # F1h D0h)
When PDF Prioritization is enabled, this timeout specifies how long the imager attempts to decode a PDF417
symbol before reporting the 1D bar code in the field of view.

Scan the following bar code, then scan four digits from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that specify the
timeout in milliseconds. For example, to enter 200 ms, scan the following bar code, then scan 0200. The range
is 0 to 5000 ms, and the default is 400 ms.

PDF Prioritization Timeout

NOTE PDF Prioritization Timeout must be at least one second lower than the Decode Session Timeout.
6 - 24 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Multicode Mode
Parameter # 677 (SSI # F1h, A5h)
Enable this parameter to allow multiple bar codes to decode upon one trigger event based on the programmed
multicode expression. The imager reports a successful decode and provides user indication only if it decodes
all bar codes indicated by the multicode expression, otherwise the decode fails. Bar codes are transmitted in
the order defined in the multicode expression. Disable this to operate in normal decode mode.

NOTE DS457-DP does not support Multicode Mode.

This mode operates in Level trigger mode only. Also disable Continuous Bar Code Read. If you enable this
mode, always orient the imager at the same distance and angle (perpendicular).

*Disable Multicode Mode

(0)

Enable Multicode Mode

(1)
 User Preferences 6 - 25

Multicode Expression
Parameter # 661 (SSI # F1h, 95h)
Use this feature to program a multicode expression for Multicode Mode (grid method). The default is 1, which
indicates any bar code.

NOTE DS457-DP does not support this parameter.

To set the multicode expression:

1. Scan the bar code below.

2. Scan bar codes from the Alphanumeric Keyboard in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
3. Scan End of Message in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.

Multicode Expression

Multicode Expression Syntax: [n] [Element 1]; [Element 2 ]; ... [Element n];
Where n is the number of elements in the overall expression.

The multicode expression describes the bar code(s) that the imager can expect to find in an image. Each
element represents one bar code in the DS457's field of view. The order of elements in the expression is the
order in which bar code data from each element transmits to the host. Elements are defined using one or more
of the following methods:

By Region. This type of element limits decoding to a specific area within the DS457's field of view. Region
coordinates are defined as the top left and bottom right corners of the region, expressed in percentages of the
field of view. These can range from 0% to 100%, or 0x00 to 0x64 in hex, for both horizontal and vertical axes.
A region element is constructed as:

[R] [4] [Top, Left] [Bottom, Right]

Where:

• [R] is the character R

• [4] is 0x04, indicating there are four bytes thereafter to describe the region
• [Top, Left] are two values representing the top left corner of the region
• [Bottom, Right] are two values representing the bottom right corner of the region
Note that the top of the field of view used for multicode expressions is the topmost part of the field of view when
the DS457's chassis rests on a horizontal surface.
6 - 26 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

By Code Type. An element can specify a specific bar code symbology to find and decode somewhere in the
field of view. A code type element is constructed as:

[C] [2] [Code Type]

Where:
• [C] is the character C
• [2] is 0x02, indicating there are two bytes thereafter to describe the code type
• [Code Type] is the desired symbology's parameter number (see Chapter 12, Symbologies). For
single-byte parameter numbers, extend the value to two bytes by adding 00 before the parameter
number.

Notes
When defining multicode expressions consider the following:

• Use the Code Type specifier if there are bar codes of more than one code type in view.
• Always use the Region specifier when there are multiple bar codes of the same code type.
• When transmission order is important (the first element in the expression transmits first), use either type
to define the order.
• When there are unwanted bar codes in view, filter them out in one of two ways:
• Use Code Type to specify only the target bar codes.
• Use Region to identify only the target bar codes.
• If the expression does not contain a Region specifier, scanning angle and distance do not matter. If you
specify a region you must scan in a fixed orientation and at a fixed distance. Because of this, it is
preferable to use the Code Type specifier rather than the Region specifier.
• When defining regions:
• Defining a region much larger than the bar code improves tolerance to scan distance and angle, but
can cause a decode of a nearby bar code instead of the target bar code. Therefore, for best
performance define larger regions when only a few bar codes are in view and those in view are widely
separated.
• Defining a region close to (or smaller than) the target bar code improves the probability of decoding
this bar code rather than one nearby, but scan distance and angle must be more accurate. Therefore,
for best performance define small regions when many bar codes are in view or those in view are close
together.
• Use Region elements to improve decode speeds by reducing the image area to search for the target bar
code.
• Specifying Code Type may also improve decode speeds for some code types.
• Although you can scan parameter bar codes when multicode mode is enabled, be aware of the following:
If the multicode expression defined a region(s), to scan a parameter bar code you must position the bar
code within the first region defined in the expression. In some cases, this first region is not the center of
the image and aiming at the parameter bar code does not result in a successful decode.

The following examples show the multicode expressions in both hex and decimal formats, however in the
sample figures the values are decimal. Be sure to use the correct base numbering system when creating an
expression. A region specified as 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 represents a region with coordinates of Top-Left (0,0)
and Bottom Right (100,50).
 User Preferences 6 - 27

Example 1
To decode one Code 128 bar code anywhere in the image (even when bar codes of other types are in view), as
in Figure 6-1, program the expression as follows:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

1C208;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is (spaces are for readability):

[MultiCode-Expression] 01 C 02 00 08 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:

0x01 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x3b

For more information on this method, see Programming a Multicode Expression via SSI Command on page
6-31.

0% 50% 100%
0%

PDF417 Code

Code 128 Code

50%

UPC-A Code

0 12345 67890 5
100%

Figure 6-1 Multicode Expression Example 1

6 - 28 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Example 2a
To decode a Code128 (Code Type=8) on the top half of the image and a PDF417 (Code Type=15) on the
bottom half of the image, as in Figure 6-2, program the expression as follows:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

2 C 2 0 8 R 4 0 0 100 50 ; C 2 0 15 R 4 0 50 100 100 ;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:

[MultiCode-Expression] 02 C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 ; C 02 00 0F R 04 00 32 64 64 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:
0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00
0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B

For more information on this method, see Programming a Multicode Expression via SSI Command on page
6-31.
 User Preferences 6 - 29

Example 2b
In Figure 6-2, if the bottom PDF417 bar code must transmit first, reverse the sequence of the two bar codes:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

2 C 2 0 15 R 4 0 50 100 100 ; C 2 0 8 R 4 0 0 100 50 ;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:

[MultiCode-Expression] 02 C 02 00 0F R 04 00 32 64 64 ; C 02 00 08 R 04 00 00 64 32 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:
0x02 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x32 0x64 0x64 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x00
0x00 0x64 0x32 0x3B

For more information on this method, see Programming a Multicode Expression via SSI Command on page
6-31.

0% 50% 100%
0%
(0,0)

Code 128 Code

(100,50)
50%
(0,50)

PDF417 Code

(160,100)
100%

Figure 6-2 Multicode Expression Example 2

6 - 30 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Example 3
To decode the set of three bar codes while excluding the center Code 128 bar code, as in Figure 6-3, the
expression is:

The expression in decimal is (formatted for readability):

3 C 2 0 15 R 4 0 0 50 50 ; C 2 [F0 24] R 4 70 0 100 40 ; C 2 0 8 R 4 65 60 100 100 ;

To program the expression via scanning parameters the sequence is:

[MultiCode-Expression] 03 C 02 00 0F R 04 00 00 32 32 ; C 02 F0 24 R 04 46 00 64 28 ;
C 02 00 08 R 04 41 3C 64 64 ; [End Of Message]

To program the expression via host command (SSI/SNAPI) the sequence is:

0x03 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x0F 0x52 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x32 0x32 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0xF0 0x24 0x52 0x04 0x46
0x00 0x64 0x28 0x3B 0x43 0x02 0x00 0x08 0x52 0x04 0x41 0x3C 0x64 0x64 0x3B

For more information on this method, see Programming a Multicode Expression via SSI Command on page
6-31.

0% 40% 50% 70% 100%

0%
(0,0) (70,0)

PDF417 Code
(40,40) Data Matrix Code (100,40)
40% 40%

50%

Code 128 Code

60%
(65,60)
Code 128 Code

(100,100)
65%
100%

Figure 6-3 Multicode Expression Example 3

 User Preferences 6 - 31

Programming a Multicode Expression via SSI Command

The following example describes how to program a Multicode expression via SSI within a Remote Scanner
Management (RSM) command.

SSI Transaction Sequences

Before sending the Multicode expression transaction (a command/response pair), perform the following
initialization transaction (command and response). This initialization transaction is required only once upon
each imager power up:

Command (to imager): 0A 80 04 00 00 06 20 00 00 FF FE 4D

Response (from imager): 0C 80 00 00 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 FD 6C

Next, program the Multicode Expression using the following basic transaction format.

Command (to imager): 17 80 04 00 00 13 06 00 02 95 41 00 42 00 06 00 [Multicode Expression in

Hex] FD A3
Response (from imager): 08 80 00 00 00 04 06 00 FF 6E

For full details on structuring Multicode expression commands, see Figure 6-4.

Legend for Figure 6-4

• All values in the table are hex, unless followed by a d which indicates decimal.
• Shaded fields represent values that change for different Multicode expressions.
Unshaded fields are fixed and are constant for all expressions.
• N: The length of the Multicode expression in bytes. Using Example 1, N = 6 decimal, 0x06 hex.
• Len1: N+17. Using Example 1, Len1 = 23 decimal, 0x17 hex.
• Len2: N+13. Using Example 1, Len2 = 19 decimal, 0x13 hex.
• Op: Command persistence.
• 0x06 stores the Multicode expression in non-volatile memory. The command persists through power
cycling.
or
• 0x05 stores the Multicode expression in RAM. The command is lost when power is removed from the
imager.
• Len4: Same value as N. Using Example 1, Len4 = 6 decimal, 0x06 hex.
• Checksum: 2's compliment checksum of bytes in the SSI Header and SSI Data. Sum all bytes, truncate
to a 2 byte value, subtract this value from 0x10000; the resulting number is the 2 byte checksum. Using
Example 1 the checksum is FDA3.
 SSI Header SSI Data = RSM Command Checksum

Len1 Fixed Fixed Len2 Op Fixed Len3 Fixed Multicode Expression MSB LSB

Example 1 17 80 04 00 00 13 06 00 02 95 41 00 42 00 06 00 00 01 43 02 00 08 3B (N=6d) FD A3
(23d) (19d) (06d)
6 - 32 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Figure 6-4 SSI Formatting of a Multicode Expression

 User Preferences 6 - 33

Multicode Mode Concatenation

Parameter # 717 (SSI # F1h, CDh)
Enable this parameter to transmit multiple decoded bar codes, as specified by the Multicode Expression, as
one bar code. Use the Multicode Concatenation Symbology parameter to specify how the concatenated bar
codes transmit.

Disable this to transmit decoded bar codes separately.

NOTE When using Multicode Mode Concatenation, disable Transmit Code ID Character on page 6-37 and check
digits.

DS457-DP does not support this parameter.

Enable Multicode Mode Concatenation

(1)

*Disable Multicode Mode Concatenation

(0)
6 - 34 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Multicode Concatenation Symbology

Parameter # 722 (SSI # F1h, D2h)
Use this parameter to specify how to transmit the concatenated bar codes decoded as specified by the
Multicode Expression. Multicode Mode Concatenation must be enabled to use this option.

NOTE DS457-DP does not support this parameter.

Concatenation as Code 128

(1)

*Concatenation as PDF417
(2)

Concatenation as Data Matrix

(3)

Concatenation as Maxicode
(4)
 User Preferences 6 - 35

Multicode Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Multicode Expression Programming

Use the following suggestions if encountering problems programming a multicode expression:

• Ensure the expression is valid. Invalid expressions are rejected during programming. When an
expression is rejected the previous expression remains intact. If after programming the expression the
imager can still decode any bar code, the expression was possibly rejected.
• When programming the multicode expression via parameter bar code, the DS457 generates beeps. If
any of the following beeps do not sound during programming, an error occurred (see Table 3-1 on page
3-4 for error indicators):
• Scanning the Multicode Expression bar code produces a two-tone (same pitch) beep.
• Scanning each value of the expression produces a two-tone (same pitch) beep.
• Scanning the End Of Message bar code produces a four-tone (high-low-high-low) beep.
• Check the expression for syntax errors.
• Try programming a simple expression to ensure the syntax is correct. See Examples of Simple Multicode
Expressions.
• Review Notes on page 6-26 for additional hints.

Troubleshooting Multicode Mode Scanning and Decoding

Use the following suggestions if encountering problems using multicode mode:

• If the DS457 appears to decode any single bar code instead of the intended multiple bar codes, ensure
you enabled Multicode Mode on page 6-24. Programming the multicode expression does not enable
multicode mode.
• When specifying Region, ensure:
• Coordinates are within range the 0-100 decimal (or 0x00 - 0x64 hexadecimal).
• Top, Left is above Bottom, Right. Top, Left is 0,0 (0x00, 0x00 hexadecimal), and Bottom, Right is
100,100 (0x64, 0x64 hexadecimal).
• Regions for two or more bar codes do not overlap.
• When specifying Code Type ensure the DS457 supports the code type. Try decoding a single bar code
without using multicode. If it does not decode try enabling the bar code type. See Chapter 12,
Symbologies.
• Experiment with simpler expressions, then add to it until you discover the source of the error. For
example try the simplest expression (see Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions) and make sure
you can scan a single bar code. If so, extend the expression by adding a second bar code, specifying a
region, or specifying the code type. Verify that the DS457 can decode this new expression. Continue
adding to the expression until it fails to decode as expected, indicating the source of the error.
• Review Notes on page 6-26 for additional hints.
6 - 36 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Examples of Simple Multicode Expressions

The simplest multicode expression is:

• One bar code of any type, anywhere in the image.

• To program this use: [MultiCode-Expression] 01 ; [End Of Message]
Another simple multicode expression is:

• One Code 128 bar code, anywhere in the image.

• To program this use: [MultiCode-Expression] 01 C 02 00 08 ; [End Of Message]
 User Preferences 6 - 37

Miscellaneous Parameters
Transmit Code ID Character
Parameter # 45 (SSI # 2Dh)
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This is useful when the imager is decoding
more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is
inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.

Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID
Characters, see Code Identifiers on page B-1.

Symbol Code ID Character

(2)

AIM Code ID Character

(1)

*None
(0)
6 - 38 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Prefix/Suffix Values

Parameter # Prefix = 105, Suffix1 = 104, Suffix2 = 106

Key Category Parameter # Prefix = 63h, Suffix1 = 62h, Suffix2 = 64h
Decimal Value Parameter # Prefix = 69h, Suffix1 = 68h, Suffix2 = 6Ah
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes can be appended to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a
prefix or suffix, scan the prefix or suffix bar code below, then scan a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes) that corresponds to that value. The first digit defines the key category (type
of character to send) and is stored in the key category parameter. The remaining three digits define the value
of the character and are stored in the decimal value parameter. Be sure to use both key category and decimal
value parameters to define the prefix/suffix value.

See Table E-1 on page E-1 for the four-digit code values. To correct an error or change a selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.

NOTE When using the imager with an SSI or SNAPI host, only a key category value of 1 is valid. All other values
are ignored.

To send a Prefix or Suffix with bar code data, first enable the format in which they are sent by setting the
Scan Data Transmission Format on page 6-39.

Scan Prefix
(7)

Scan Suffix 1
(6)

Scan Suffix 2
(8)
 User Preferences 6 - 39

Scan Data Transmission Format

Parameter # 235 (SSI # EBh)
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following eight bar codes corresponding to the desired format.

NOTE If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.

To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 6-38.

*Data As Is
(0)

<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>

(1)

<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>

(2)

<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>

(3)

<PREFIX> <DATA >

(4)
6 - 40 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)

<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>

(5)

<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>

(6)

<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>

(7)

FN1 Substitution Values

Key Category Parameter # 103 (SSI # 67h)
Decimal Value Parameter # 109 (SSI # 6Dh)
The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support a FN1 Substitution feature. When enabled any FN1
character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code is substituted with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key).

When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, then set
the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the currently installed host interface for the
desired value.
To select a FN1 substitution value via bar code menus:
1. Scan the bar code below.

Set FN1 Substitution Value

2. Look up the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the currently
installed host interface. Enter the 4-digit ASCII Value by scanning each digit in Appendix D, Numeric Bar
Codes.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel.
To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page
10-11.
 User Preferences 6 - 41

Transmit “No Read” Message

Parameter # 94 (SSI # 5Eh)
Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. When enabled, the characters
NR are transmitted when a bar code is not decoded. When disabled, if a symbol does not decode, nothing is
sent to the host.

Enable No Read
(1)

*Disable No Read
(0)

Report Version
Scan the bar code below to report the version of software currently installed in the imager.

Report Software Version

6 - 42 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
CHAPTER 7 IMAGER PREFERENCES

Introduction
This chapter describes imager preference features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting
these features.

The imager ships with the settings shown in the Imager Preferences Default Table on page 7-2 (also see
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit
requirements, programming is not necessary.

There are two ways to change a parameter value:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in
memory.
• For SSI and USB SNAPI hosts, send a “parameter send” command from the host system. Hexadecimal
parameter numbers appear in this chapter below the parameter title, and options appear in parenthesis
beneath the accompanying bar codes. See the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s Guide for
detailed instructions for changing parameter values using this method.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.

Select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beep signal
activates. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.

To return all features to default values, scan the Set Default Parameter on page 6-5. Throughout the
programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

Feature/Option
*Enable Decode Aiming Pattern
* Indicates default
(2) Option decimal value for
programming
7-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to disable the decode aiming
pattern, scan the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern bar code listed under Decode Aiming Pattern on page 7-6.
For systems that use a beeper and LED, a fast warble beep sounds and the LED lights, signifying a successful
parameter entry.

Other parameters, such as Crop to Pixel Address, require scanning several bar codes. See these parameter
descriptions for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Imager Preferences Parameter Defaults

Table 7-1 lists defaults for imager preferences parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) provided in Imager Preferences on page 7-4.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters

Table 7-1 Imager Preferences Default Table

Parameter Page
Parameter Number SSI Number Default Number

Imaging Options

Decoding Autoexposure 297 F0h 29h Enable 7-5

Decoding Illumination 298 F0h 2Ah Enable 7-6

Decode Aiming Pattern 306 F0h 32h Enable 7-6

Aim Brightness 668 F1h 9Ch 0 7-7

Illumination Brightness 669 F1h 9Dh 10 7-7

Low Light Enhancement 612 F1h 64h Disable 7-8

Power Up Light in Presentation Mode 1198 F8h 04h AEh Disable 7-8

Presentation Mode Field of View 609 F1h 61h Default (Reduced) 7-9

Frame Rate 674 F1h A2h Auto 7-10

Image Capture Autoexposure 360 F0h 68h Enable 7-12

Image Capture Illumination 361 F0h 69h Enable 7-12

Fixed Gain 568 F1h 38h 50 7-13

Exposure Time 567 F4h F1h 37h 100 (10 ms) 7-13

Snapshot Mode Timeout 323 F0h 43h 0 (30 seconds) 7-14

 Imager Preferences 7-3

Table 7-1 Imager Preferences Default Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Snapshot Aiming Pattern 300 F0h 2Ch Enable 7-14

Presentation Snapshot by Motion 647 F1h 87h Disable 7-15

Continuous Snapshot 648 F1h 88h Disable 7-15

Image Cropping 301 F0h 2Dh Disable 7-16

Crop to Pixel Addresses 315, 316, F4h F0h 3Bh; 0 top, 0 left, 7-17
317, 318 F4h F0h 3Ch; 479 bottom, 751 right
F4h F0h 3Dh;
F4h F0h 3Eh

Image Resolution 302 F0h 2Eh Full 7-18

Image Brightness (Target White) 390 F0h 86h 180 7-19

Image File Format Selection 304 F0h 30h JPEG 7-20

JPEG Image Options 299 F0h 2Bh Quality 7-20

JPEG Quality Value 305 F0h 31h 65 7-21

JPEG Size Value 561 F1h 31h 160 (164K) 7-21

Image File Meta Data 693 F1h B5h Disable 7-22

Image Enhancement 564 F1h 34h Off 7-23

Image Edge Sharpening 664 F1h 98h Low 7-24

Image Contrast Enhancement 666 F1h 9Ah Off 7-25

Image Rotation 665 F1h 99h 0 7-26

Bits per Pixel (BPP) 303 F0h 2Fh 8 BPP 7-27

Signature Capture 93 5Dh Disable 7-28

Signature Capture Image File Format 313 F0h 39h JPEG 7-29
Selection

Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP) 314 F0h 3Ah 8 BPP 7-30

Signature Capture Width 366 F4h F0h 6Eh 400 7-30

Signature Capture Height 367 F4h F0h 6Fh 100 7-31

Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 F0h A5h 65 7-31

Video Mode Format Selector 916 F2h 94h JPEG 7-32

Video View Finder 324 F0h 44h Disable 7-32

Target Video Frame Size 328 F0h 48h 2200 bytes 7-33

Video View Finder Image Size 329 F0h 49h 1700 bytes 7-33

Video Resolution 667 F1h 9Bh 1/4 resolution 7-34

7-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Imager Preferences
The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics. Image capture occurs in all modes of
operation, including decode, video, and snapshot.

Operational Modes
The imager has three modes of operation:

• Decode Mode
• Snapshot Mode
• Snapshot with Viewfinder Mode
• Video Mode.

Decode Mode
By default, upon a trigger event, the imager attempts to locate and decode bar codes within its field of view.
The imager remains in this mode as long as the trigger is active, until it decodes a bar code, or it reaches the
Decode Session Timeout on page 6-19.

Snapshot Mode
Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high-quality image and transmit it to the host. To temporarily enter this mode
scan the Snapshot Mode bar code. While in this mode the imager blinks the green LED at 1-second intervals
to indicate it is not in standard operating (decode) mode.

In Snapshot Mode, the DS457 laser aiming pattern highlights the area to capture in the image. The next trigger
event instructs the imager to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host. A short time may pass
(less than 2 seconds) between trigger activation and image capture as the imager adjusts to the lighting
conditions. Hold the imager steady until image capture, denoted by a single beep.

If a trigger event does not occur within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period, the imager returns to Decode
Mode. Use Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 7-14 to adjust this timeout period. The default timeout period is
30 seconds.

To disable the laser aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode, see Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 7-14.

Use Video View Finder on page 7-32 to enable Snapshot with Viewfinder Mode. In this mode the imager
behaves as a video camera until the trigger activates, at which time a Snapshot occurs as described above.
 Imager Preferences 7-5

Video Mode
In this mode the imager behaves as a video camera as long as the trigger is active. Upon trigger release, the
imager returns to Decode Mode. Scan the Video Mode bar code to temporarily enter Video Capture Mode.

NOTE The DS457 does not support Video Mode when Trigger Mode on page 6-11 is set to Presentation Mode
(the default).

Snapshot Mode

Video Mode

Decoding Autoexposure
Parameter # 297 (SSI # F0h 29h)
Select Enable Decoding Autoexposure to allow the imager to control gain settings and exposure
(integration) time to best capture an image for decode mode.

Select Disable Decoding Autoexposure to manually adjust the gain and exposure time (see Fixed Gain and
Exposure Time). Zebra recommends this option only for advanced users with difficult decoding situations.

NOTE Decoding Autoexposure does not apply in Presentation Mode.

*Enable Decoding Autoexposure

(1)

Disable Decoding Autoexposure

(0)
7-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Decoding Illumination
Parameter # 298 (SSI # F0h 2Ah)
Selecting Enable Decoding Illumination causes the imager to turn on illumination every image capture to aid
decoding. Select Disable Decoding Illumination to prevent the imager from using decoding illumination.

Enabling illumination usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the
distance to the target increases.

NOTE Changing this parameter while using Presentation Mode, with or without Motion Enhancement, is not
recommended.

*Enable Decoding Illumination

(1)

Disable Decoding Illumination

(0)

Decode Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 306 (SSI # F0h 32h)
This parameter only applies in Decode Mode. Select Enable Decode Aiming Pattern to project the aiming
pattern during bar code capture, or Disable Decode Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off.

NOTE If Picklist Mode on page 6-19 is enabled, the decode aiming pattern turns on even when disabled.

*Enable Decode Aiming Pattern

(2)

Disable Decode Aiming Pattern

(0)
 Imager Preferences 7-7

Aim Brightness
Parameter # 668 (SSI # F1h 9Ch)
This feature sets the brightness of the aim pattern. The default is 0, which indicates that the aim pattern is
always on in between camera exposures. For values above 0, each increment of the brightness value
increments the aim duration 0.5 ms.

To program Aim Brightness, scan this bar code followed by three numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric
Bar Codes that correspond to the value representing brightness. Settings range from 0 to 255. The maximum
aim duration is limited by the frame time, so the recommended range is 0 to 30 when the frame rate is set to 60
fps.

Aim Brightness

Illumination Brightness
Parameter # 669 (SSI # F1h 9Dh)
This feature sets the brightness of the illumination by altering LED power. The default is 10, which is maximum
LED brightness. For values from 1 to 10, LED brightness varies from lowest to highest level of brightness.

To program Illumination Brightness, scan this bar code followed by two numeric bar codes in Appendix D,
Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the value of desired illumination brightness. For example, to set
Illumination Brightness to 6, scan the bar code below followed by the 0 and 6 bar codes.

Illumination Brightness
7-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Low Light Enhancement

Parameter # 612 (SSI # F1h 64h)
In Presentation Mode, selecting Enable Low Light Enhancement causes illumination to remain on at low
power in low lighting conditions. When the imager detects an object in its field of view, it turns on illumination
full power. Select Disable Low Light Enhancement to prevent illumination from remaining on under low
lighting conditions

Enable Low Light Enhancement

(1)

*Disable Low Light Enhancement

(0)

Power Up Light in Presentation Mode

Parameter # 1198 (SSI # F8h 04h AEh)
Enable this option to turn on full illumination upon power-up when in presentation mode or transitioning to
presentation mode. If Low Light Enhancement is also enabled, illumination turns on at low power in
presentation mode. If both are disabled, illumination remains off until motion is detected.

Enable Power Up Light in Presentation Mode

(1)

*Disable Power Up Light in Presentation Mode

(0)
 Imager Preferences 7-9

Presentation Mode Field of View

Parameter # 609 (SSI # F1h 61h)
In Presentation Mode, by default the imager searches for a bar code in a smaller region around the aiming
pattern’s center cross to speed search time.

To use a full field of view, scan Presentation Mode Full Field of View. This allows the imager to search the
larger area of the aiming pattern.

*Presentation Mode Default Field of View

(1)

Presentation Mode Full Field of View

(2)
7 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Frame Rate
Parameter # 674 (SSI # F1h A2h)
Select an option to control the rate at which frames are captured and transmitted. When capturing images,
using lower frame rates can improve image brightness.

NOTE The aiming pattern appears to blink when the frame rate is 30 frames per second (fps) or lower.

Settings for frame rate are:

• Auto - The imager controls the frame rate and changes dynamically based on the mode of operation to
provide optimal performance.
• 60 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 60 frames per second
• 55 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 55 frames per second
• 50 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 50 frames per second
• 45 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 45 frames per second
• 40 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 40 frames per second
• 30 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 30 frames per second
• 20 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 20 frames per second
• 15 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 15 frames per second
• 10 fps - The frame rate is fixed at 10 frames per second

*Auto
(0)

60 fps
(1)

55 fps
(5)

50 fps
(6)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 11

Frame Rate (continued)

45 fps
(7)

40 fps
(8)

30 fps
(2)

20 fps
(9)

15 fps
(3)

10 fps
(4)
7 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Image Capture Autoexposure

Parameter # 360 (SSI # F0h 68h)
Select Enable Image Capture Autoexposure to allow the imager to control gain settings and exposure
(integration) time to best capture an image for snapshot mode.

Select Disable Image Capture Autoexposure to manually adjust the gain and exposure time (see Fixed Gain
and Exposure Time). Zebra recommends this option only for advanced users with difficult image capture
situations.

NOTE Image Capture Autoexposure does not apply in Presentation Mode.

*Enable Image Capture Autoexposure

(1)

Disable Image Capture Autoexposure

(0)

Image Capture Illumination

Parameter # 361 (SSI # F0h 69h)
Selecting Enable Image Capture Illumination causes illumination to turn on during every image capture.
Disable illumination to prevent the imager from using illumination.

Enabling illumination usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the
distance to the target increases.

*Enable Image Capture Illumination

(1)

Disable Image Capture Illumination

(0)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 13

Fixed Gain
Parameter # 568 (SSI # F1h 38h)
This parameter only applies when Decoding or Image Capture Autoexposure is disabled. Gain is a means of
amplifying the raw image data before it is converted into 8-bit grayscale values. Increasing the fixed gain
increases brightness and contrast, but also increases noise (undesired electrical fluctuations in the image)
which makes the image less attractive and/or harder to decode.

NOTE Fixed Gain does not apply in Presentation Mode.

To set the fixed gain, scan the bar code below followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes,
in the range of 1 to 100, representing the value. The default is 50.

Fixed Gain

Exposure Time
Parameter # 567 (SSI # F4h F1h 37h)
This parameter only applies when Decoding or Image Capture Autoexposure is disabled. It configures the
exposure for both Decode and Snapshot modes.

NOTE Exposure Time does not apply in Presentation Mode.

Each integer value represents 100 s worth of exposure. The default value is 100 which results in an exposure
setting of 10 ms.

To set the Exposure Time parameter, scan Fixed Exposure followed by four numeric bar codes representing
the value in the range of 1 - 1000. Insert leading zeros if necessary. For example, to set a Fixed Exposure
value of 9.9 ms, scan 0, 0, 9, 9. See Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes.

Exposure Time
(4 digits)
7 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Snapshot Mode Timeout

Parameter # 323 (SSI # F0h 43h)
This parameter sets the amount of time the imager remains in Snapshot Mode. The imager exits Snapshot
Mode upon a trigger event, or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses. To set this timeout value, scan the
bar code below followed by a bar code from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. The default value is 0 which
represents 30 seconds; values increment by 30. For example, 1 = 60 seconds, 2 = 90 seconds, etc.

Snapshot Mode Timeout

Snapshot Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 300 (SSI # F0h 2Ch)
Select Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode, or Disable
Snapshot Aiming Pattern to turn the aiming pattern off.

*Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern

(1)

Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern

(0)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 15

Presentation Snapshot by Motion

Parameter # 647 (SSI # F1h 87h)
When the imager detects an object in its field of view, and the object stops moving, it attempts to capture a high
quality image and transmit it to the host. This applies to snapshot mode only. Select a bar code below to enable
or disable this feature.

*Disable Presentation Snapshot by Motion

(0)

Enable Presentation Snapshot by Motion

(1)

Continuous Snapshot
Parameter # 648 (SSI # F1h 88h)
Select Enable to stay in Snapshot Mode, and Disable to return to normal decode mode after image capture.
This only applies in Presentation Snapshot by Motion mode.

If you enable this, you can not scan parameter bar codes to exit this mode. To restore normal decode mode,
power cycle the imager, then scan the Disable Continuous Snapshot bar code.

*Disable Continuous Snapshot

(0)

Enable Continuous Snapshot

(1)
7 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Image Cropping
Parameter # 301 (SSI # F0h 2Dh)
This parameter crops a captured image. Select Disable Image Cropping to present the full 742 x 480 pixels.
Select Enable to crop the image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel Addresses on page 7-17.

NOTE The imager has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels. Setting the cropping area to less than 3 pixels transfers
the entire image.

Enable Image Cropping

(1)

*Disable Image Cropping

(Use Full 742 x 480 Pixels)
(0)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 17

Crop to Pixel Addresses

Parameter # 315 (SSI # F4h F0h 3Bh (Top))
Parameter # 316 (SSI # F4h F0h 3Ch (Left))
Parameter # 317 (SSI # F4h F0h 3Dh (Bottom))
Parameter # 318 (SSI # F4h F0h 3Eh (Right))
If Enable Image Cropping is selected, set the pixel addresses from (0,0) to (751,479) to crop to.

Columns are numbered from 0 to 751, rows from 0 to 479. Specify four values for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right,
where Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses, and Left and Right correspond to column pixel
addresses. For example, for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom-right section of the image, set the
following values:

Top = 476, Bottom = 479, Left = 744, Right = 751

To set the pixel address to crop to, scan each Pixel Address bar code followed by three bar codes from
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes which represent the value. Include leading zeros, so to enter a value of 3, for
example, scan 0, 0, 3.

NOTE The imager has a minimum cropping resolution of four pixels; increment and decrement cropping
addresses in multiples of four. Other values are rounded up. For example, choosing to crop from the top at
addresses 0, 1, or 2 (removing 1, 2, or 3 pixels) has the same result as cropping at address 3; this
removes four rows from the top.

Top Pixel Address

(0 - 479 Decimal)

Left Pixel Address

(0 - 751 Decimal)

Bottom Pixel Address

(0 - 479 Decimal)

Right Pixel Address

(0 - 751 Decimal)
7 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Image Resolution
Parameter # 302 (SSI # F0h 2Eh)
This option alters image resolution before compression. Rows and columns are removed from the image,
resulting in a smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution.

Select one of the following values:

Resolution Uncropped Image

Value Size

Full 752 x 480

1/2 376 x 240

1/4 188 x 120

*Full Resolution
(0)

1/2 Resolution
(1)

1/4 Resolution
(3)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 19

Image Brightness (Target White)

Parameter # 390 (SSI # F0h 86h)
This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot and Video modes when using autoexposure.
White and black are defined as 255 decimal and 0, respectively. Setting the value to the default of 180 results
in a white level of ~180 for the image.

To set the Image Brightness parameter, scan Image Brightness below followed by three numeric bar codes
representing the value. Include leading zeros. For example, to set an Image Brightness value of 99, scan 0, 9,
9. See Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes for numeric bar codes.

*180

Image Brightness
(3 digits)
7 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Image File Format Selector

Parameter # 304 (SSI # F0h 30h)
Select an image format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The imager stores captured images
in the selected format.

BMP File Format

(3)

*JPEG File Format

(1)

TIFF File Format

(4)

JPEG Image Options

Parameter # 299 (SSI # F0h 2Bh)
JPEG images can be optimized for either size or for quality. Scan the Quality Selector bar code to enter a
quality value; the imager then selects the corresponding image size. Scan the Size Selector bar code to enter
a size value; the imager then selects the best image quality.

*JPEG Quality Selector

(1)

JPEG Size Selector

(0)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 21

JPEG Quality and Size Value

JPEG Quality = Parameter # 305 (SSI # F0h 31h)
JPEG Size = Parameter # 561 (SSI # F1h 31h)
If you select JPEG Quality Selector, scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from
Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100, where 100 represents the highest
quality image.

If you select JPEG Size Selector, scan JPEG Size Value followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric
Bar Codes corresponding to a value from 5 to 350 which represents the file size in multiples of 1024 bytes
(1K). For example, setting this value to 8 (008) permits the file size to be as large as 8192 bytes. The default is
160 (164K).

JPEG Quality Value

(Default: 065)
(5 - 100 Decimal)

JPEG Size Value

(Default: 040)
(5 - 150 Decimal)
7 - 22 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Image File Meta Data

Parameter # 693 (SSI # F1h B5h)
Enable this option to tag images transmitted in JPEG format with the following EXIF 2.2 standard data fields:

• Time (since power up)

• Sensor used
• Device name
• Manufacturer
• Frame rate
• Host type
• Image number (since power up)
• Image Enhancement parameter setting
• Image Edge Sharpening parameter setting
• Image Contract Enhancement parameter setting.
This parameter has no effect on images transmitted in TIFF or BMP format.

Enable Image File Meta Data

(1)

*Disable Image File Meta Data

(0)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 23

Image Enhancement
Parameter # 564 (SSI # F1h 34h)
This feature uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is
visually pleasing. If you select User, also set the Image Edge Sharpening on page 7-24 and Image Contrast
Enhancement on page 7-25 to enhance the image.

The levels of image enhancement are:

• Off (0) - Default

• Low (1)
• Med (2)
• High (3)
• User (4).

*Off
(0)

Low
(1)

Medium
(2)

High
(3)

User
(4)
7 - 24 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Image Edge Sharpening

Parameter # 664 (SSI # F1h 98h)
This feature uses an edge sharpening technique, and only applies if you set the Image Enhancement
parameter to User. To set this parameter, scan the Image Edge Sharpening bar code, followed by three
numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that represent the image edge sharpening value.
Alternatively, to set a recommended value, scan one of the value bar codes below.

Recommended settings are:

• Off (0)
• Low (30) - Default
• Med (75)
• High (100).

Image Edge Sharpening

Off
(0)

*Low
(30)

Medium
(75)

High
(100)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 25

Image Contrast Enhancement

Parameter # 666 (SSI # F1h 9Ah)
Enable this feature to enhance the contrast of an image. This parameter only applies if you set the Image
Enhancement parameter to User.

*Disable
(0)

Enable
(1)
7 - 26 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Image Rotation
Parameter # 665 (SSI # F1h 99h)
This parameter controls the rotation of the image by 0, 90,180, or 270 degrees.

*Rotate 0o
(0)

Rotate 90o
(1)

Rotate 180o
(2)

Rotate 270o
(3)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 27

Bits per Pixel

Parameter # 303 (SSI # F0h 2Fh)
Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image. Select 1 BPP for a black
and white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey
to each pixel. The imager ignores these settings for JPEG files, which always use 8 BPP.

1 BPP
(0)

4 BPP
(1)

*8 BPP
(2)
7 - 28 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Signature Capture
Parameter # 93 (SSI # 5Dh)
A signature capture bar code is a special-purpose symbology which delineate a signature capture area in a
document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an
index to various signatures. The region inside the bar code pattern is considered the signature capture area.

Output File Format

Decoding a signature capture bar code de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG,
or TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.

File Descriptor
Signature Image
Output Format Signature Type Signature Image Size
(1 byte) (1 byte) (4 bytes) (BIG Endian)

JPEG - 1 1-8 0x00000400 0x00010203…..

BMP - 3
TIFF - 4

To enable or disable Signature Capture, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Signature Capture

(1)

*Disable Signature Capture

(0)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 29

Signature Capture File Format Selector

Parameter # 313 (SSI # F0h 39h)
Select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The imager stores captured
signatures in the selected format.

BMP Signature Format

(3)

*JPEG Signature Format

(1)

TIFF Signature Format

(4)
7 - 30 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Signature Capture Bits per Pixel

Parameter # 314 (SSI # F0h 3Ah)
Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a signature. Select 1 BPP for a
black and white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels
of grey to each pixel. The imager ignores these settings for JPEG files, which always use 8 BPP.

1 BPP
(0)

4 BPP
(1)

*8 BPP
(2)

Signature Capture Width

Parameter # 366 (SSI # F4h F0h 6Eh)
The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of
the signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area requires a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of
width to height.

To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width bar code, followed by 3 bar
codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 040 to 752 decimal.

Signature Capture Width

(Default: 400)
(040- 752 Decimal)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 31

Signature Capture Height

Parameter # 367 (SSI # F4h F0h 6Fh)
To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height bar code, followed by 3 bar
codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to a value in the range of 010 to 480 decimal.

Signature Capture Height (Default: 100)

(010 - 480 Decimal)

Signature Capture JPEG Quality

Parameter # 421 (SSI # F0h A5h)
Scan the JPEG Quality Value bar code followed by 3 bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes
corresponding to a value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.

JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065)

(5 - 100 Decimal)
7 - 32 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Video Mode Format Selector

Parameter # 916 (SSI # F2h 94h)
When the imager is in Video Mode, select whether to send data in BMP or JPEG format.

BMP File Format

(3)

*JPEG File Format

(1)

Video View Finder

Parameter # 324 (SSI # F0h 44h)
Select Enable Video View Finder to project the video view finder while in Image Mode, or Disable Video
View Finder to turn the video view finder off.

*Disable Video View Finder

(0)

Enable Video View Finder

(1)
 Imager Preferences 7 - 33

Target Video Frame Size

Parameter # 328 (SSI # F0h 48h)
Select the number of 100-byte blocks to transmit per second. Selecting a smaller value transmits more frames
per second but reduces video quality; selecting a larger value increases video quality but slows transmission.

To set the Target Video Frame Size, scan the bar code below followed by two bar codes from Appendix D,
Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to the 100-byte value from 800 to 20,000 bytes. For example, to select
1500 bytes, enter 1, 5. To select 900 bytes, enter 0, 9. The default is 2200 bytes.

Target Video Frame Size

Video View Finder Image Size

Parameter # 329 (SSI # F0h 49h)
Select the number of 100-byte blocks. Values range from 800 to 12,000 bytes. Selecting a smaller value
transmits more frames per second; selecting a larger value increases video quality.

To set the Video View Finder Imager Size, scan the bar code below followed by two bar codes from Appendix
D, Numeric Bar Codes corresponding to the 100-byte value from 800 to 12,000 bytes. For example, to select
1500 bytes, enter 1, 5. To select 900 bytes, enter 0, 9. The default is 1700 bytes.

Video View Finder Image Size

7 - 34 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Video Resolution
Parameter # 667 (SSI # F1h 9Bh)
This parameter alters the video resolution before transmission. Rows and columns are removed from the
image, resulting in a smaller video image containing the original content with reduced resolution.

Select one of the following values:

Resolution Value Video Image Size

Full 752 x 480

1/2 376 x 240

1/4 188 x 120

Full Resolution
(0)

1/2 Resolution
(1)

*1/4 Resolution
(3)
CHAPTER 8 SSI INTERFACE

Introduction
This chapter describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a
communications link between Zebra decoders (e.g., scan engines, imagers, hand-held scanners,
two-dimensional scanners, hands-free scanners, and RF base stations) and a serial host. It provides the
means for the host to control the imager.

Communications
All communication between the imager and host occurs over the hardware interface lines using the SSI
protocol. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72-40451-xx, for more information on
SSI.

The host and the imager exchange messages in packets. A packet is a collection of bytes framed by the proper
SSI protocol formatting bytes. The maximum number of bytes per packet that the SSI protocol allows for any
transaction is 257 (255 bytes + 2 byte checksum).

Decode data can be sent as ASCII data (unpacketed), or as part of a larger message (packeted), depending on
the imager configuration.

SSI performs the following functions for the host device:

• Maintains a bi-directional interface with the imager

• Allows the host to send commands that control the imager
• Passes data from the imager to a host device in SSI packet format or straight decode message.
The working environment of the SSI consists of an imager, a serial cable which attaches to the host device,
and in some instances, a power supply.

SSI transmits all decode data including special formatting (e.g., AIM ID). Parameter settings can control the
format of the transmitted data.

The imager can also send parameter information, product identification information, or event codes to the host.

All commands sent between the imager and host must use the format described in the SSI Message Formats
section. SSI Transactions on page 8-3 describes the required sequence of messages in specific cases.
8-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 8-1 lists all the SSI opcodes the imager supports. It identifies the SSI partner allowed to send a message
of each type. The host transmits opcodes designated type H. The imager transmits type D opcodes, and either
partner can transmit Host/Decoder (H/D) types.

Table 8-1 SSI Commands

Name Type Opcode Description

AIM_OFF H 0xC4 Deactivate aim pattern.

AIM_ON H 0xC5 Activate aim pattern.

BEEP H 0xE6 Sound the beeper.

CAPABILITIES_REPLY D 0xD4 Reply to CAPABILITIES_REQUEST; contains a list of the

capabilities and commands the imager supports.

CAPABILITIES_REQUEST H 0xD3 Request capabilities report from the imager.

CMD_ACK H/D 0xD0 Positive acknowledgment of received packet.

CMD_NAK H/D 0xD1 Negative acknowledgment of received packet.

DECODE_DATA D 0xF3 Decode data in SSI packet format.

EVENT D 0xF6 Event indicated by associated event code.

LED_OFF H 0xE8 De-activate LED output.

LED_ON H 0xE7 Activate LED output.

PARAM_DEFAULTS H 0xC8 Set parameter default values.

PARAM_REQUEST H 0xC7 Request values of certain parameters.

PARAM_SEND H/D 0xC6 Send parameter values.

REPLY_ID D 0xA6 Reply to REQUEST_ID; contains imager's serial number.

REPLY_REVISION D 0xA4 Reply to REQUEST_REVISION contains imager's

software/hardware configuration.

REQUEST_ID H 0xA3 Request the imager's serial number.

REQUEST_REVISION H 0xA3 Request the imager's configuration.

SCAN_DISABLE H 0xEA Prevent the operator from scanning bar codes.

SCAN_ENABLE H 0xE9 Permit bar code scanning.

SLEEP H 0xEB Request to place the imager into low power.

START_DECODE H 0xE4 Tell imager to attempt to decode a bar code.

STOP_DECODE H 0xE5 Tell imager to abort a decode attempt.

WAKEUP H N/A Wake up imager after it has entered low power mode.

For details of the SSI protocol, refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide (72-40451-xx).
 SSI Interface 8-3

SSI Transactions
General Data Transactions

ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, all packeted messages must have a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK response,
unless the command description states otherwise. This parameter is enabled by default. Zebra recommends
leaving this handshaking enabled to provide feedback to the host. Raw decode data and WAKEUP do not use
ACK/NAK handshaking since they are not packeted data.

Following is an example of a problem which can occur if you disable ACK/NAK handshaking:

• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message to the imager to change the baud rate from 9600 to 19200.
• The imager cannot interpret the message.
• The imager does not implement the change the host requested.
• The host assumes that the parameter change occurred and acts accordingly.
• Communication is lost because the change did not occur on both sides.
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, the following occurs:

• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message.

• The imager cannot interpret the message.
• The imager CMD_NAKs the message.
• The host resends the message.
• The imager receives the message successfully, responds with CMD_ACK, and implements parameter
changes.
8-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Transfer of Decode Data

The Decode Data Packet Format parameter controls how decode data is sent to the host. Set this parameter to
send the data in a DECODE_DATA packet. Clear this parameter to transmit the data as raw ASCII data.

NOTE When transmitting decode data as raw ASCII data, ACK/NAK handshaking does not apply regardless of
the state of the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter.

ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data

The imager sends a DECODE_DATA message after a successful decode. The imager waits for a
programmable time-out for a CMD_ACK response. If it does not receive the response, the imager tries to send
two more times before issuing a host transmission error. If the imager receives a CMD_NAK from the host, it
may attempt a retry depending on the cause field of the CMD_NAK message.

(1)

DECODE_DATA

Decoder
Host
Data is captured
(2)
by decoder
CMD_ACK

message sent

ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data

Even though the ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled, no handshaking occurs because the handshaking applies
only to packeted data. In this example the packeted_decode parameter is disabled.

Decoder
ASCII data Host
Data is captured
by decoder

ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA

In this example ACK/NAK does not occur even though packeted_decode is enabled because the ACK/NAK
handshaking parameter is disabled.

Decoder (1)

Data is captured DECODE_DATA Host

by decoder
message sent
 SSI Interface 8-5

ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data

Data captured by the imager is sent to the host.

Decoder (1)

Data is captured ASCII data sent

Host
by decoder

Communication Summary
RTS/CTS Lines
All communication must use RTS/CTS handshaking as described in the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s
Guide, p/n 72-40451-xx. If hardware handshaking is disabled or bypassed, the WAKEUP command must be
sent prior to all other communications, or the first byte of a communication message may be lost during the
imager wakeup sequence.

ACK/NAK Option
Enable or disable ACK/NAK handshaking. This handshaking is enabled by default and Zebra recommends
leaving it enabled. Disabling this handshaking can cause communication problems, as handshaking is the only
acknowledgment that a message was received, and if it was received correctly. ACK/NAK is not used with
unpacketed decode data regardless of whether or not it is enabled.

Number of Data Bits

All communication with the imager must use 8-bit data.

Serial Response Time-out

The Serial Response Time-out parameter determines how long to wait for a handshaking response before
trying again, or aborting any further attempts. Set the same value for both the host and imager.

NOTE You can temporarily change the Serial Response Time-out when the host takes longer to process an ACK
or longer data string. Zebra does not recommend frequent permanent changes due to limited write cycles
of non-volatile memory.

Retries
When sending data, the host should resend twice after the initial send if the imager does not respond with an
ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled), or response data (e.g., PARAM_SEND,
REPLY_REVISION). If the imager replies with a NAK RESEND, the host resends the data. All resent
messages must have the resend bit set in the Status byte.

The imager resends data two times after the initial send if the host fails to reply with an ACK or NAK (if
ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled).
8-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Time-out, ACK/NAK Handshake

If you use PARAM_SEND to change these serial parameters, the ACK response to the PARAM_SEND uses
the previous values for these parameters. The new values then take effect for the next transaction.

Errors
The imager issues a communication error when:

• The CTS line is asserted when the imager tries to transmit, and is still asserted on each of 2 successive
retries
• Failure to receive an ACK or NAK after initial transmit and two resends.

Things to Remember When Using SSI Communication

When not using hardware handshaking, space messages sufficiently apart. The host must not communicate
with the imager if the imager is transmitting.

When using hardware handshaking, frame each message properly with the handshaking signals. Do not try to
send two commands within the same handshaking frame.

There is a permanent/temporary bit in the PARAM_SEND message. Removing power from the imager
discards temporary changes. Permanent changes are written to non-volatile memory. Frequent changes
shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.
 SSI Interface 8-7

Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI

Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 6-17 provides bar codes to select a general time delay. To program a
more specific delay value, use an SSI command according to Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power

Value Timeout Value Timeout Value Timeout Value Timeout

0x00 15 Mins 0x10 1 Sec 0x20 1 Min 0x30 1 Hour

0x01 30 Mins 0x11 1 Sec 0x21 1 Min 0x31 1 Hour

0x02 60 Mins 0x12 2 Secs 0x22 2 Mins 0x32 2 Hours

0x03 90 Mins 0x13 3 Secs 0x23 3 Mins 0x33 3 Hours

N/A N/A 0x14 4 Secs 0x24 4 Mins 0x34 4 Hours

N/A N/A 0x15 5 Secs 0x25 5 Mins 0x35 5 Hours

N/A N/A 0x16 6 Secs 0x26 6 Mins 0x36 6 Hours

N/A N/A 0x17 7 Secs 0x27 7 Mins 0x37 7 Hours

N/A N/A 0x18 8 Secs 0x28 8 Mins 0x38 8 Hours

N/A N/A 0x19 9 Secs 0x29 9 Mins 0x39 9 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1A 10 Secs 0x2A 10 Mins 0x3A 10 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1B 15 Secs 0x2B 15 Mins 0x3B 15 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1C 20 Secs 0x2C 20 Mins 0x3C 20 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1D 30 Secs 0x2D 30 Mins 0x3D 30 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1E 45 Secs 0x2E 45 Mins 0x3E 45 Hours

N/A N/A 0x1F 60 Secs 0x2F 60 Mins 0x3F 60 Hours

CAUTION With hardware handshaking disabled, the DS457 wakes from low power mode upon receiving a
character. However, the DS457 does not process this character or any others it receives during the 7
ms period following wakeup. Wait at least 7 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.
8-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Simple Serial Interface Default Parameters

This section describes how to set up the imager with an SSI host. When using SSI, program the imager via bar
code menu or hosts commands.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

* Indicates default
*Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option
(6)
Option value for programming

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.

Table 8-3 lists the defaults for the SSI host. There are two ways to change the default values:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in
memory. To recall the default parameter values, scan the *Restore Defaults bar code on page 6-5.
• Download data through the device’s serial port using SSI. Hexadecimal parameter numbers appear in
this chapter below the parameter title, and options appear in parenthesis beneath the accompanying bar
codes. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s Guide for detailed instructions for
changing parameters using this method.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 8-3 SSI Default Table

Parameter Page
Parameter Number SSI Number Default Number

Select SSI Host N/A N/A N/A 8-9

Baud Rate 156 9Ch 9600 8-10

Parity 258 9Eh None 8-11

Check Parity 151 97h Disable 8-12

Software Handshaking 159 9Fh ACK/NAK 8-12

Host RTS Line State 154 9Ah Low 8-13

Decode Data Packet Format 238 EEh Send Raw Decode Data 8-13

Host Serial Response Time-out 155 9Bh 2 sec 8-14

Host Character Time-out 239 EFh 200 msec 8-15

 SSI Interface 8-9

Table 8-3 SSI Default Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Multipacket Option 334 F0h 4Eh Option 1 8-16

Interpacket Delay 335 F0h 4Fh 0 ms 8-17

Event Reporting

Decode Event 256 F0h 00h Disable 8-18

Boot Up Event 258 F0h 02h Disable 8-19

Parameter Event 259 F0h 03h Disable 8-19

NOTE SSI interprets Prefix, Suffix1, and Suffix2 values listed in Table E-1 on page E-1 differently than other
interfaces. SSI does not recognize key categories, only the 3-digit decimal value. The default value of
7013 is interpreted as CR only.

SSI Host Parameters

Select SSI Host
To select SSI as the host interface, scan the following bar code.

SSI Host
8 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Baud Rate
Parameter # 156 (SSI # 9Ch)
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the imager's baud rate to match the baud
rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.

*Baud Rate 9600

(6)

Baud Rate 19,200

(7)

Baud Rate 38,400

(8)

Baud Rate 57,600

(10)

Baud Rate 115,200

(11)

Baud Rate 230,400

(13)
 SSI Interface 8 - 11

Baud Rate (continued)

Baud Rate 460,800

(14)

Baud Rate 921,600

(15)

Parity
Parameter # 258 (SSI # 9Eh)
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to
host device requirements.

• Select Odd parity and the parity bit has a value 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1
bits is contained in the coded character.
• Select Even parity and the parity bit has a value 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of
1 bits is contained in the coded character.
• If no parity is required, select None.

Odd
(0)

Even
(1)

*None
(4)
8 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Check Parity
Parameter # 151 (SSI # 97h)
Select whether or not to check the parity of received characters. Use the Parity parameter to select the type of
parity.

*Do Not Check Parity

(0)

Check Parity
(1)

Software Handshaking
Parameter # 159 (SSI # 9Fh)
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to the control hardware handshaking offers.
Hardware handshaking is always enabled; you cannot disable it.

• Disable ACK/NAK Handshaking: When this option is selected, the imager neither generates nor
expects ACK/NAK handshaking packets.
• Enable ACK/NAK Handshaking: When this option is selected, after transmitting data, the imager
expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host. The imager also ACKs or NAKs messages from
the host.

The imager waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK. If
the imager does not get a response in this time, it resends its data up to two times before discarding the
data and declaring a transmit error.

Disable ACK/NAK
(0)

*Enable ACK/NAK
(1)
 SSI Interface 8 - 13

Host RTS Line State

Parameter # 154 (SSI # 9Ah)
This parameter sets the expected idle state of the Serial Host RTS line.

The SSI Interface is used with host applications which also implement the SSI protocol. However, you can use
the imager in a "scan-and-transmit" mode to communicate with any standard serial communication software on
a host PC (see Decode Data Packet Format on page 8-13). If transmission errors occur in this mode, the host
PC may be asserting hardware handshaking lines which interfere with the SSI protocol. Scan the Host: RTS
High bar code to address this problem.

*Host: RTS Low

(0)

Host: RTS High

(1)

Decode Data Packet Format

Parameter # 238 (SSI # EEh)
This parameter selects whether to transmit decoded data in raw format (unpacketed), or with the packet format
defined by the serial protocol.

Selecting the raw format disables ACK/NAK handshaking for decode data.

*Send Raw Decode Data

(0)

Send Packeted Decode Data

(1)
8 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Host Serial Response Time-out

Parameter # 155 (SSI # 9Bh)
This parameter specifies how long the imager waits for an ACK or NAK before resending. Also, if the imager
wants to send, and the host has already been granted permission to send, the imager waits for the designated
time-out before declaring an error.

To set the delay period (options are 2, 5, 7.5, or 9,9 seconds), scan one of the following bar codes.

NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.

*Low - 2 Seconds
(20)

Medium - 5 Seconds
(50)

High - 7.5 Seconds

(75)

Maximum - 9.9 Seconds

(99)
 SSI Interface 8 - 15

Host Character Time-out

Parameter # 239 (SSI # EFh)
This parameter determines the maximum time the imager waits between characters transmitted by the host
before discarding the received data and declaring an error.

To set the delay period (options are 200, 500, 750, or 990 ms), scan one of the following bar codes.

NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.

*Low - 200 ms
(20)

Medium - 500 ms
(50)

High - 750 ms
(75)

Maximum - 990 ms
(99)
8 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Multipacket Option
Parameter # 334 (SSI # F0h, 4Eh)
This parameter controls ACK/NAK handshaking for multi-packet transmissions.

• Multi-Packet Option 1: The host sends an ACK / NAK for each data packet during a multi-packet
transmission.
• Multi-Packet Option 2: The imager sends data packets continuously, with no ACK/NAK handshaking to
pace the transmission. The host, if overrun, can use hardware handshaking to temporarily delay imager
transmissions. At the end of transmission, the imager waits for a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK.
• Multi-Packet Option 3: Option 3 is the same as option 2 with the addition of a programmable interpacket
delay.

*Multipacket Option 1
(0)

Multipacket Option 2
(1)

Multipacket Option 3
(2)
 SSI Interface 8 - 17

Interpacket Delay
Parameter # 335 (SSI # F0h, 4Fh)
This parameter specifies the interpacket delay if you selected Multipacket Option 3.

To set the delay period (options are 0, 25, 50, 75, or 99 ms), scan one of the following bar codes.

NOTE Other values are available via SSI command.

*Minimum - 0 ms
(0)

Low - 25 ms
(25)

Medium - 50 ms
(50)

High - 75 ms
(75)

Maximum - 99 ms
(99)
8 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Event Reporting
The host can request the imager to provide certain information (events) relative to the imager’s behavior.
Enable or disable the events listed in Table 8-4 and on the following pages by scanning the appropriate bar
codes.

Table 8-4 Event Codes

Event Class Event Code Reported

Decode Event Non parameter decode 0x01

Boot Up Event System power-up 0x03

Parameter Event Parameter entry error 0x07

Parameter stored 0x08
Defaults set (and parameter event is 0x0A
enabled by default)
Number expected 0x0F

Decode Event
Parameter # 256 (SSI # F0h, 00h)
When enabled, the imager generates a message to the host upon a successful bar code decode. When
disabled, no notification is sent.

Enable Decode Event

(1)

*Disable Decode Event

(0)
 SSI Interface 8 - 19

Boot Up Event
Parameter # 258 (SSI # F0h, 02h)
When enabled, the imager generates a message to the host whenever power is applied. When disabled, no
notification is sent.

Enable Boot Up Event

(1)

*Disable Boot Up Event

(0)

Parameter Event
Parameter # 259 (SSI # F0h, 03h)
When enabled, the imager generates a message to the host when one of the events specified in Table 8-4 on
page 8-18 occurs. When disabled, no notification is sent.

Enable Parameter Event

(1)

*Disable Parameter Event

(0)
8 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
CHAPTER 9 SERIAL INTERFACE

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the imager with a serial host. The serial interface connects the imager to
point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available serial port (e.g., com port).

If the host is not listed in Table 9-2, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication
parameters to match the host.

NOTE The imager uses TTL signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. System architectures
that use RS-232C signal levels require conversion circuitry.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

* Indicates Default *Baud Rate 57,600 Feature/Option

NOTE The SSI Host on page 8-9 is automatically selected when a serial cable is attached. To select another
RS-232 host, select one of the Serial Host Types on page 9-5, and then scan other bar code menus in this
chapter as part of initial configuration.

Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.

CAUTION The DS457 wakes from low power mode upon receiving a character. However, the DS457 does not
process this character or any others it receives during the 7 ms period following wakeup. Wait at least
7 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.
9-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Serial Parameter Defaults

Table 9-1 lists the defaults for serial host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Serial Host Parameters section beginning on page 9-3.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 9-1 Serial Host Default Table

Page
Parameter Default
Number

Serial Host Parameters

Serial Host Types Standard RS-232 9-5

Baud Rate 9600 9-7

Parity Type None 9-9

Data Bits 8-Bit 9-9

Check Receive Errors Enable 9-10

Hardware Handshaking None 9-11

Software Handshaking None 9-13

Host Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec 9-15

RTS Line State Low RTS 9-16

Beep on <BEL> Disable 9-16

Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 9-17

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 9-18

Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 9-18

 Serial Interface 9-3

Serial Host Parameters

Various serial hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or Common Use Terminal Equipment
(CUTE-LP/LG bar code readers) sets the defaults listed in Table 9-2.

Table 9-2 Terminal-Specific Serial Defaults

Wincor- Wincor-
Parameter ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode B/ Olivetti Omron CUTE
Mode A OPOS/JPOS

Transmit Code ID Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Data Trans- Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/ Data/Suffix Prefix//

mission Format Suffix Data/
Suffix

Prefix None None None None STX (1003) None STX (1002)

Suffix CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013) CR (1013)

ETX (1003)

Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600

Parity Even None Odd Odd Even None Even

ASCII Format 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit

Hardware RTS/CTS None RTS/CTS RTS/CTS Option 3 None None None

Handshaking Option 3 Option 3

Software None None None None ACK/NAK None None

Handshaking

Serial Response 9.9 Sec. 2 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec.
Time-out

RTS Line State High Low Low Low = No data to Low High High
send

Beep On <BEL> Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

*In Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
**If Nixdorf Mode B is scanned without the imager connected to the proper host, it may appear
unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different serial host type within 5 seconds of cycling power
to the imager.
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select
CUTE, scan *Enable Parameter Scanning (1) on page 6-6, then change the host selection.
9-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Serial Host Parameters (continued)

Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or
Common Use Terminal Equipment (CUTE-LP/LG bar code readers) enables the transmission of code ID
characters listed in Table 9-3. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the
Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals.

Table 9-3 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters

Wincor- Wincor-Nixdorf
Code Type ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B/ Olivetti Omron CUTE
Mode A OPOS/JPOS
UPC-A A A A A A A A

UPC-E E E C C C E None

EAN-8/JAN-8 FF FF B B B FF None

EAN-13/JAN-13 F F A A A F A

Bookland EAN F F A A A F None

Code 39 C <len> None M M M <len> C <len> 3

Code 39 Full ASCII None None M M None None 3

Trioptic None None None None None None None

Code 32 None None None None None None None

Codabar N <len> None N N N <len> N <len> None

Code 128 L <len> None K K K <len> L <len> 5

GS1-128 L <len> None P P P <len> L <len> 5

Code 93 None None L L L <len> None None

I 2 of 5 I <len> None I I I <len> I <len> 1

D 2 of 5 H <len> None H H H <len> H <len> 2

MSI None None O O O <len> None None

Code 11 None None None None None None None

IATA H<len> None H H H<len> H<len> 2

GS1 Databar None None E E None None None

Variants

PDF417 None None Q Q None None 6

MicroPDF417 None None S S None None 6

Data Matrix None None R R None None 4

Maxicode None None T T None None None

QR Codes None None U U None None 7

Aztec/Aztec Rune None None V V None None 8
 Serial Interface 9-5

Serial Host Types

To select a serial host interface, scan one of the following bar codes.

NOTE Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the serial driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data
bits, handshaking). Selecting another serial host type bar code changes these settings.

NOTE Selecting one of the Serial Host Types disables SSI support. To restore SSI support, scan SSI Host on
page 8-9.

NOTE The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE,
scan *Enable Parameter Scanning (1) on page 6-6, then change the host selection.

*Standard RS-232

ICL Serial

Wincor-Nixdorf Serial Mode A

Wincor-Nixdorf Serial Mode B

9-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Serial Host Types (continued)

Olivetti ORS4500

Omron

OPOS/JPOS

Fujitsu Serial

CUTE
 Serial Interface 9-7

Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the imager's baud rate to match the baud
rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.

*Baud Rate 9600

Baud Rate 19,200

Baud Rate 38,400

Baud Rate 57,600

Baud Rate 115,200

Baud Rate 230,400

9-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Baud Rate (continued)

Baud Rate 460,800

Baud Rate 921,600

 Serial Interface 9-9

Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to
host device requirements.

• Select Odd parity to set the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1
bits are contained in the coded character.
• Select Even parity to set the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1
bits are contained in the coded character.
• Select None when no parity bit is required.

Odd

Even

*None

Data Bits
This parameter allows the imager to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.

7-Bit

*8-Bit
9 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Check Receive Errors

Select whether or not to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters. The parity value of
received characters is verified against the setting of Parity on page 9-9.

*Check For Received Errors

Do Not Check For Received Errors

 Serial Interface 9 - 11

Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of a serial port designed to operate either with or without the hardware
handshaking lines Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS).

If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is not selected, scan data transmits as it becomes available. Select
Standard RTS/CTS handshaking to transmit scan data according to the following sequence:

• The imager reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the imager waits up to the Host Serial
Response Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after the Host Serial Response Time-out
(default) the CTS line is still asserted, the imager sounds a transmit error and discards any scanned data.
• When the CTS line is de-asserted, the imager asserts the RTS line and waits up to the Host Serial
Response Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, data transmits. If, after the
Host Serial Response Time-out (default) the CTS line is not asserted, the imager sounds a transmit error
and discards the data.
• When data transmission completes, the imager de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character.
• The host responds by negating CTS. The imager checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next
transmission of data.

During data transmission, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between
characters, the imager aborts transmission, sounds a transmission error, and discards the data.

If the above communication sequence fails, the imager issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost
and must be rescanned.

If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes
precedence.

NOTE The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.

• None: Scan this bar code to disable hardware handshaking.

• Standard RTS/CTS: Scan this bar code to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking.
• RTS/CTS Option 1: The imager asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The
imager de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.
• RTS/CTS Option 2: RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the imager waits
for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response
Time-out (default), the imager issues an error indication and discards the data.
• RTS/CTS Option 3: The imager asserts RTS prior to any data transmission, regardless of the state of
CTS. The imager waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out (default) for CTS to be asserted. If CTS is
not asserted during this time, the imager issues an error indication and discards the data. The imager
de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.
9 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Hardware Handshaking (continued)

*None

Standard RTS/CTS

RTS/CTS Option 1

RTS/CTS Option 2

RTS/CTS Option 3
 Serial Interface 9 - 13

Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to, or instead of, the control hardware
handshaking offers. There are five options.

If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes
precedence.

• None: Data transmits immediately. No response is expected from host.

• ACK/NAK: After transmitting data, the imager expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host.
When the imager receives a NAK, it transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK.
After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received, the imager issues an error
indication and discards the data.

The imager waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK. If
the imager does not receive a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data.
There are no retries when a time-out occurs.
• ENQ: The imager waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If the imager does
not receive an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Time-out, it issues an error indication and discards
the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time-out to
prevent transmission errors.
• ACK/NAK with ENQ: This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data due to a
NAK from the host, an additional ENQ is not required.
• XON/XOFF: An XOFF character turns the imager transmission off until the imager receives an XON
character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
• The imager receives an XOFF before it has data to send. When the imager has data to send, it waits
up to the Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If it does not
receive an XON within this time, the imager issues an error indication and discards the data.
• The imager receives an XOFF during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending the
current byte. When the imager receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data message. The
imager waits indefinitely for the XON.
9 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Software Handshaking (continued)

*None

ACK/NAK

ENQ

ACK/NAK with ENQ

XON/XOFF
 Serial Interface 9 - 15

Host Serial Response Time-out

This parameter specifies how long the imager waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before determining that a
transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software handshaking modes, or
RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.

*Minimum: 2 Sec

Low: 2.5 Sec

Medium: 5 Sec

High: 7.5 Sec

Maximum: 9.9 Sec

9 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

RTS Line State

This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or
High RTS line state.

*Host: Low RTS

Host: High RTS

Beep on <BEL>
When this parameter is enabled, the imager issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character on the serial
line. <BEL> gains a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event.

Beep On <BEL> Character

(Enable)

*Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character

(Disable)

NOTE A NULL character must be sent to the imager before BEL to ensure the BEL character is processed
correctly.
 Serial Interface 9 - 17

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.

*Minimum: 0 msec

Low: 25 msec

Medium: 50 msec

High: 75 msec

Maximum: 99 msec
9 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options

Select Nixdorf Mode B to indicate when the imager beeps and turns on its LED after a decode.

*Normal Operation
(Beep/LED immediately after decode)

Beep/LED After Transmission

Beep/LED After CTS Pulse

Ignore Unknown Characters

Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes with Unknown
Characters to send all bar code data except for unknown characters. The imager issues no error beeps.
Select Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send bar code data up to the first unknown
character. The imager issues an error beep.

*Send Bar Code

(with unknown characters)

Do Not Send Bar Codes

(with unknown characters)
 Serial Interface 9 - 19

ASCII Character Set for Serial Hosts

You can assign the values in Table 9-4 as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission.

Table 9-4 Prefix/Suffix Values

Prefix/Suffix Full ASCII

ASCII Character
Value Code 39 Encode Character

1000 %U NUL

1001 $A SOH

1002 $B STX

1003 $C ETX

1004 $D EOT

1005 $E ENQ

1006 $F ACK

1007 $G BELL

1008 $H BCKSPC

1009 $I HORIZ TAB

1010 $J LF/NW LN

1011 $K VT

1012 $L FF

1013 $M CR/ENTER

1014 $N SO

1015 $O SI

1016 $P DLE

1017 $Q DC1/XON

1018 $R DC2

1019 $S DC3/XOFF

1020 $T DC4

1021 $U NAK

1022 $V SYN

1023 $W ETB

1024 $X CAN

1025 $Y EM

1026 $Z SUB

1027 %A ESC
9 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 9-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix Full ASCII

ASCII Character
Value Code 39 Encode Character

1028 %B FS

1029 %C GS

1030 %D RS

1031 %E US

1032 Space Space

1033 /A !

1034 /B "

1035 /C #

1036 /D $

1037 /E %

1038 /F &

1039 /G ‘

1040 /H (

1041 /I )

1042 /J *

1043 /K +

1044 /L ,

1045 - -

1046 . .

1047 /O /

1048 0 0

1049 1 1

1050 2 2

1051 3 3

1052 4 4

1053 5 5

1054 6 6

1055 7 7

1056 8 8

1057 9 9

1058 /Z :
 Serial Interface 9 - 21

Table 9-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix Full ASCII

ASCII Character
Value Code 39 Encode Character

1059 %F ;

1060 %G <

1061 %H =

1062 %I >

1063 %J ?

1064 %V @

1065 A A

1066 B B

1067 C C

1068 D D

1069 E E

1070 F F

1071 G G

1072 H H

1073 I I

1074 J J

1075 K K

1076 L L

1077 M M

1078 N N

1079 O O

1080 P P

1081 Q Q

1082 R R

1083 S S

1084 T T

1085 U U

1086 V V

1087 W W

1088 X X

1089 Y Y
9 - 22 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 9-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix Full ASCII

ASCII Character
Value Code 39 Encode Character

1090 Z Z

1091 %K [

1092 %L \

1093 %M ]

1094 %N ^

1095 %O _

1096 %W `

1097 +A a

1098 +B b

1099 +C c

1100 +D d

1101 +E e

1102 +F f

1103 +G g

1104 +H h

1105 +I i

1106 +J j

1107 +K k

1108 +L l

1109 +M m

1110 +N n

1111 +O o

1112 +P p

1113 +Q q

1114 +R r

1115 +S s

1116 +T t

1117 +U u

1118 +V v

1119 +W w

1120 +X x
 Serial Interface 9 - 23

Table 9-4 Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/Suffix Full ASCII

ASCII Character
Value Code 39 Encode Character

1121 +Y y

1122 +Z z

1123 %P {

1124 %Q |

1125 %R }

1126 %S ~

1127 Undefined

7013 ENTER
9 - 24 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
CHAPTER 10 USB INTERFACE

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the imager with a USB host. The imager connects directly to a USB host,
or a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

* Indicates Default *North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature/Option

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
10 - 2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

USB Parameter Defaults

Table 10-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 10-3.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 10-1 USB Host Default Table

Page
Parameter Default
Number

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type USB HID Keyboard 10-3

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking Enable 10-5

USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American 10-6

USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 10-8

USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 10-8

USB Ignore Unknown Characters Enable 10-9

Emulate Keypad Disable 10-9

Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero Disable 10-10

Quick Keypad Emulation Disable 10-10

USB FN1 Substitution Disable 10-11

Function Key Mapping Disable 10-11

Simulated Caps Lock Disable 10-12

Convert Case None 10-13

USB Static CDC Enable 10-13

USB Ignore Beep Directive Honor 10-14

USB Ignore Type Directive Honor 10-14

USB Polling Interval 3 msec 10-15

Fast HID Keyboard Enable 10-17

IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original) 10-17

 USB Interface 10 - 3

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type
Select the desired USB device type.

NOTE When changing USB Device Types, the imager automatically resets and issues the standard startup beep
sequences.

NOTE Before selecting USB CDC Host, install the CDC INF file on the host to ensure the imager does not stall
during power up (due to a failure to enumerate USB). If the imager stalls, to recover it:
1) Install the CDC INF file
or
2) After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the imager to power up using an
alternate USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type.

NOTE The SSI over USB CDC option enables a subset of the SSI protocol over the USB CDC interface which
omits all hardware handshaking functionality. For more information refer to the SSI Programmer's Guide.

NOTE Select IBM Hand-Held USB to disable data transmission when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable
command. Aim, illumination, and decoding are still permitted. Select OPOS (IBM Hand-held with Full
Disable) to completely shut off the imager when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command,
including aim, illumination, decoding, and data transmission.

*USB HID Keyboard

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface

10 - 4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

USB Device Type (continued)

USB CDC Host

Simple COM Port Emulation

SSI over USB CDC

IBM Hand-Held USB

OPOS
(IBM Hand-held with Full Disable)
 USB Interface 10 - 5

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking

After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, select whether to enable or disable status
handshaking.

*Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking

Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking

10 - 6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)

Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB Keyboard HID
device.

NOTE When changing USB country keyboard types the imager automatically resets. The imager issues the
standard startup beep sequences.

*North American Standard USB Keyboard

German Windows

French Windows

French Canadian Windows 95/98

French Canadian Windows 2000/XP

French Belgian Windows

 USB Interface 10 - 7

USB Country Keyboard Types (continued)

Spanish Windows

Italian Windows

Swedish Windows

UK English Windows

Japanese Windows (ASCII)

Portuguese-Brazilian Windows
10 - 8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

USB Keystroke Delay

This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to
increase the delay when hosts require a slower data transmission.

*No Delay

Medium Delay (20 msec)

Long Delay (40 msec)

USB CAPS Lock Override

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Enable this to preserve the case of the data
regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese, Windows (ASCII)
keyboard type and can not be disabled.

Override Caps Lock Key

(Enable)

*Do Not Override Caps Lock Key

(Disable)
 USB Interface 10 - 9

USB Ignore Unknown Characters

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device and IBM device. Unknown characters are characters
the host does not recognize. Select Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters to send all bar code data
except for unknown characters. No error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown
Characters is selected, for IBM devices, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to
the host, and an error beep sounds. For USB Keyboard HID devices, the bar code characters up to the
unknown character are sent, and an error beep sounds.

*Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

(Transmit)

Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters

(Disable)

Emulate Keypad
Enable this to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A is sent
as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”. This allows support for other country variants.

*Disable Keypad Emulation

Enable Keypad Emulation

10 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero

Enable this to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a
leading zero. For example ASCII A is sent as “ALT MAKE” 0 0 6 5 “ALT BREAK”.

*Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

Quick Keypad Emulation

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard (HID) device and if Emulate Keypad is enabled. This parameter
enables a quicker method of keypad emulation where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not
found on the keyboard. The default value is Disable.

Enable

*Disable
 USB Interface 10 - 11

USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Enable this to replace any FN1 characters in an
EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 6-40 to set the Key
Category and Key Value).

Enable FN1 Substitution

*Disable FN1 Substitution

Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control-key sequences (see Table 10-2 on page 10-18). Enable
this to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry
remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled.

*Disable Function Key Mapping

Enable Function Key Mapping

10 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Simulated Caps Lock

Enable this to invert upper and lower case characters on the bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on
the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s current Caps Lock state.

*Disable Simulated Caps Lock

Enable Simulated Caps Lock

 USB Interface 10 - 13

Convert Case
Enable this to convert all bar code data to the selected case.

*No Case Conversion

Convert All to Upper Case

Convert All to Lower Case

USB Static CDC

When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1, second device =
COM2, thirrd device = COM3, etc.)

When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.

*Enable USB Static CDC

Disable USB Static CDC

10 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

USB Ignore Beep Directive

This applies only to IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following bar codes to
honor or ignore a beep directive. All directives are still acknowledged as if they were processed.

*Honor USB Beep Directive

Ignore USB Beep Directive

USB Ignore Type Directive

This applies only to IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following bar codes to
honor or ignore a code type enable/disable directive. All directives are still acknowledged as if they were
processed.

*Honor USB Ignore Type Directive

Ignore USB Ignore Type Directive

 USB Interface 10 - 15

USB Polling Interval

This option speeds up the USB Keyboard HID Device. Scan one of the following bar codes to set the polling
interval, which is the rate at which data can be sent between the image and the host computer. A lower number
indicates a faster data rate. The default is 3 msec.

Changing the polling interval re-initializes the imager.

CAUTION Ensure the host can support the selected data rate. Selecting a data rate that is too fast for the host
may result in lost data.

1 msec

2 msec

*3 msec

4 msec
10 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

USB Polling Interval (continued)

5 msec

6 msec

7 msec

8 msec

9 msec
 USB Interface 10 - 17

Fast HID Keyboard

This option transmits USB Keyboard HID data at a faster rate.

NOTE Quick Emulation overrides Fast HID.

*Enable

Disable

IBM Specification Level

When the IBM Specification Level is set to Version 0 (Original), the following code types are sent as
Unknown:

• Data Matrix
• QR Code
• MicroQR Code
• Aztec
When the level is set to Version 2.2, the code types are sent with the appropriate IBM identifiers.

*IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original)

IBM Specification Level Version 2.2

10 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

ASCII Character Set for USB

Table 10-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values

Prefix/ Suffix Full ASCII Code 39

Keystroke
Value Encode Character

1000 %U CTRL 2

1001 $A CTRL A

1002 $B CTRL B

1003 $C CTRL C

1004 $D CTRL D

1005 $E CTRL E

1006 $F CTRL F

1007 $G CTRL G

1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1

1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1

1010 $J CTRL J

1011 $K CTRL K

1012 $L CTRL L

1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1

1014 $N CTRL N

1015 $O CTRL O

1016 $P CTRL P

1017 $Q CTRL Q

1018 $R CTRL R

1019 $S CTRL S

1020 $T CTRL T

1021 $U CTRL U

1022 $V CTRL V

1023 $W CTRL W

1024 $X CTRL X

1025 $Y CTRL Y
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if Function Key Mapping on page 10-11
is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
 USB Interface 10 - 19

Table 10-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Full ASCII Code 39

Keystroke
Value Encode Character

1026 $Z CTRL Z

1027 %A CTRL [/ESC1

1028 %B CTRL \

1029 %C CTRL ]

1030 %D CTRL 6

1031 %E CTRL -

1032 Space Space

1033 /A !

1034 /B “

1035 /C #

1036 /D $

1037 /E %

1038 /F &

1039 /G ‘

1040 /H (

1041 /I )

1042 /J *

1043 /K +

1044 /L ,

1045 - -

1046 . .

1047 /O /

1048 0 0

1049 1 1

1050 2 2

1051 3 3

1052 4 4

1053 5 5

1054 6 6
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if Function Key Mapping on page 10-11
is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
10 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 10-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Full ASCII Code 39

Keystroke
Value Encode Character

1055 7 7

1056 8 8

1057 9 9

1058 /Z :

1059 %F ;

1060 %G <

1061 %H =

1062 %I >

1063 %J ?

1064 %V @

1065 A A

1066 B B

1067 C C

1068 D D

1069 E E

1070 F F

1071 G G

1072 H H

1073 I I

1074 J J

1075 K K

1076 L L

1077 M M

1078 N N

1079 O O

1080 P P

1081 Q Q

1082 R R

1083 S S
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if Function Key Mapping on page 10-11
is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
 USB Interface 10 - 21

Table 10-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Full ASCII Code 39

Keystroke
Value Encode Character

1084 T T

1085 U U

1086 V V

1087 W W

1088 X X

1089 Y Y

1090 Z Z

1091 %K [

1092 %L \

1093 %M ]

1094 %N ^

1095 %O _

1096 %W `

1097 +A a

1098 +B b

1099 +C c

1100 +D d

1101 +E e

1102 +F f

1103 +G g

1104 +H h

1105 +I i

1106 +J j

1107 +K k

1108 +L l

1109 +M m

1110 +N n

1111 +O o

1112 +P p
1
The keystroke in bold is sent only if Function Key Mapping on page 10-11
is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.
10 - 22 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 10-2 USB Prefix/Suffix Values (Continued)

Prefix/ Suffix Full ASCII Code 39

Keystroke
Value Encode Character

1113 +Q q

1114 +R r

1115 +S s

1116 +T t

1117 +U u

1118 +V v

1119 +W w

1120 +X x

1121 +Y y

1122 +Z z

1123 %P {

1124 %Q |

1125 %R }

1126 %S ~
1The keystroke in bold is sent only if Function Key Mapping on page 10-11
is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent.

Table 10-3 USB ALT Key Character Set

ALT Keys Keystroke

2064 ALT 2

2065 ALT A

2066 ALT B

2067 ALT C

2068 ALT D

2069 ALT E

2070 ALT F

2071 ALT G

2072 ALT H

2073 ALT I

2074 ALT J

2075 ALT K

2076 ALT L
 USB Interface 10 - 23

Table 10-3 USB ALT Key Character Set (Continued)

ALT Keys Keystroke

2077 ALT M

2078 ALT N

2079 ALT O

2080 ALT P

2081 ALT Q

2082 ALT R

2083 ALT S

2084 ALT T

2085 ALT U

2086 ALT V

2087 ALT W

2088 ALT X

2089 ALT Y

2090 ALT Z

Table 10-4 USB GUI Key Character Set

GUI Key Keystroke

3000 Right Control Key

3048 GUI 0

3049 GUI 1

3050 GUI 2

3051 GUI 3

3052 GUI 4

3053 GUI 5

3054 GUI 6

3055 GUI 7

3056 GUI 8

3057 GUI 9

3065 GUI A

3066 GUI B

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key
on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key
to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
10 - 24 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 10-4 USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)

GUI Key Keystroke

3067 GUI C

3068 GUI D

3069 GUI E

3070 GUI F

3071 GUI G

3072 GUI H

3073 GUI I

3074 GUI J

3075 GUI K

3076 GUI L

3077 GUI M

3078 GUI N

3079 GUI O

3080 GUI P

3081 GUI Q

3082 GUI R

3083 GUI S

3084 GUI T

3085 GUI U

3086 GUI V

3087 GUI W

3088 GUI X

3089 GUI Y

3090 GUI Z

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key
on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key
to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.

Table 10-5 USB F Key Character Set

F Keys Keystroke

5001 F1

5002 F2

5003 F3
 USB Interface 10 - 25

Table 10-5 USB F Key Character Set (Continued)

F Keys Keystroke

5004 F4

5005 F5

5006 F6

5007 F7

5008 F8

5009 F9

5010 F10

5011 F11

5012 F12

5013 F13

5014 F14

5015 F15

5016 F16

5017 F17

5018 F18

5019 F19

5020 F20

5021 F21

5022 F22

5023 F23

5024 F24

Table 10-6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6042 *

6043 +

6044 undefined

6045 -

6046 .

6047 /

6048 0

6049 1
10 - 26 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 10-6 USB Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued)

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6050 2

6051 3

6052 4

6053 5

6054 6

6055 7

6056 8

6057 9

6058 Enter

6059 Num Lock

Table 10-7 USB Extended Keypad Character Set

Extended Keypad Keystroke

7001 Break

7002 Delete

7003 PgUp

7004 End

7005 Pg Dn

7006 Pause

7007 Scroll Lock

7008 Backspace

7009 Tab

7010 Print Screen

7011 Insert

7012 Home

7013 Enter

7014 Escape

7015 Up Arrow

7016 Down Arrow

7017 Left Arrow

7018 Right Arrow

CHAPTER 11 OCR READING

Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the imager for OCR reading. The DS457 can read 6 to 60 point OCR
typeface. It supports font types OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR-E13B, and US Currency Serial Number.

OCR is not as secure as a bar code. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an accurate
OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit.

All OCR fonts are disabled by default. Enabling OCR can slow bar code decoding. Enabling more than one
OCR font could also slow OCR decoding and impact OCR decoding accuracy.

Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

* Indicates Default *Disable OCR-A Feature/Option

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the bar code clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.
11 - 2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR Parameter Defaults

Table 11-1 lists the defaults for OCR parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s)
provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 11-3.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and
miscellaneous default parameters.

Table 11-1 OCR Default Table

Parameter
Parameter SSI Number Default Page Number
Number

OCR Parameters

OCR-A 680 F1h A8h Disable 11-3

OCR-A Variant 684 F1h ACh Full ASCII 11-3

OCR-B 681 F1h A9h Disable 11-5

OCR-B Variant 685 F1h ADh Full ASCII 11-6

MICR E13B 682 F1h AAh Disable 11-9

US Currency 683 F1h ABh Disable 11-10

OCR Orientation 687 F1h AFh 0o 11-10

OCR Lines 691 F1h B3h 1 11-12

OCR Minimum Characters 689 F1h B1h 3 11-13

OCR Maximum Characters 690 F1h B2h 100 11-13

OCR Security Level 554 F1h 2Ah 80 11-13

OCR Subset 686 F1h AEh Selected font 11-14

variant

OCR Quiet Zone 695 F1h B7h 50 11-14

OCR Bright Illumination 701 F1h BDh Disable 11-15

OCR Template 547 F1h 23h 54R 11-16

OCR Check Digit Modulus 688 F1h B0h 1 11-25

OCR Check Digit Multiplier 700 F1h BCh 121212121212 11-26

OCR Check Digit Validation 694 F1h B6h None 11-27

Inverse OCR 856 F2h 58h None 11-31

 OCR Reading 11 - 3

OCR Parameters
Enable/Disable OCR-A
Parameter # 680 (SSI # F1h A8h)
To enable or disable OCR-A, scan one of the following bar codes.

Enable OCR-A
(1)

*Disable OCR-A
(0)

OCR-A Variant
Parameter # 684 (SSI # F1 ACh)
Font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font. To choose a variant,
scan one of the following bar codes. Selecting the most appropriate font variant optimizes performance and
accuracy.

OCR-A supports the following variants:

• OCR-A Full ASCII

!"#$()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\^
• OCR-A Reserved 1
$*+-./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-A Reserved 2
$*+-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-A Banking
-0123456789<>

Special banking characters output as the following representative characters:

outputs as f

outputs as c

outputs as h

NOTE Enable OCR-A before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-A, set the variant to its default
(OCR-A Full ASCII).
11 - 4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR-A Variant (continued)

*OCR-A Full ASCII

(0)

OCR-A Reserved 1
(1)

OCR-A Reserved 2
(2)

OCR-A Banking
(3)
 OCR Reading 11 - 5

Enable/Disable OCR-B
Parameter # 681 (SSI # F1h A9h)
To enable or disable OCR-B, scan one of the following bar codes.

Enable OCR-B
(1)

*Disable OCR-B
(0)
11 - 6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR-B Variant
Parameter # 685 (SSI # F1 ADh)
OCR-B has the following variants. Selecting the most appropriate font variant affects performance and
accuracy.

• OCR-B Full ASCII

!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
• OCR-B Banking
#+-0123456789<>JNP|
• OCR-B Limited
+,-./0123456789<>ACENPSTVX
• OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
• OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
• OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-B Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
• OCR-B Passport
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
• OCR-B Visa Type A
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-B Visa Type B
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ

To choose a variant, scan one of the following bar codes. Selecting the following OCR-B variants automatically
sets the appropriate OCR Lines on page 11-12. These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and
checking for that particular document type:

Variant OCR Lines Setting

Passport 2
TD1 ID Cards 3
TD2 ID Cards 2
Visa Type A 2
Visa Type B 2
Selecting one of the ISBN Book Numbers automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum, so you do not
need to set this.
 OCR Reading 11 - 7

OCR-B Variant (continued)

For the best performance in passport reading, fix the target passport and the imager in place (6.5 - 7.5”).

NOTE Enable OCR-B before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-B, set the variant to its default
(OCR-B Full ASCII).

*OCR-B Full ASCII

(0)

OCR-B Banking
(1)

OCR-B Limited
(2)

OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers

(6)

OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers

(7)

OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1)

3 Line ID Cards
(3)
11 - 8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR-B Variant (continued)

OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2)

2-Line ID Cards
(8)

Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect

(14)

OCR-B Passport
(4)

OCR-B Visa Type A

(9)

OCR-B Visa Type B

(10)
 OCR Reading 11 - 9

Enable/Disable MICR E13B

Parameter # 682 (SSI # F1h AAh)
To enable or disable MICR E13B, scan one of the following bar codes.

MICR E 13B uses the following characters:

TOAD characters (Transit, On Us, Amount, and Dash) output as the following representative characters:

outputs as t

outputs as a

outputs as o

outputs as d

Enable MICR E13B

(1)

*Disable MICR E13B

(0)
11 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Enable/Disable US Currency Serial Number

Parameter # 683 (SSI # F1 ABh)
To enable or disable US Currency Serial Number, scan one of the following bar codes.

Enable US Currency
(1)

*Disable US Currency
(0)

OCR Orientation
Parameter # 687 (SSI # F1 AFh)
Select one of five options to specify the orientation of an OCR string to be read:

• 0o to the imaging engine (default)

• 270o clockwise (or 90o counterclockwise) to the imaging engine
• 180o (upside down) to the imaging engine
• 90o clockwise to the imaging engine
• Omnidirectional
Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes.
 OCR Reading 11 - 11

OCR Orientation (continued)

*OCR Orientation 0o
(0)

OCR Orientation 270o Clockwise

(1)

OCR Orientation 180o Clockwise

(2)

OCR Orientation 90o Clockwise

(3)

OCR Orientation Omnidirectional

(4)
11 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR Lines
Parameter # 691 (SSI # F1 B3h)
To select the number of OCR lines to decode, scan one of the following bar codes. Selecting Visas, Passport,
TD1, or TD2 ID cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines. Also see OCR-B Variant on page 11-6.

*OCR 1 Line
(1)

OCR 2 Lines
(2)

OCR 3 Lines
(3)
 OCR Reading 11 - 13

OCR Minimum Characters

Parameter # 689 (SSI # F1 B1h)
To select the minimum number of OCR characters (not including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
bar code, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the Numeric Keypad from the Advanced
Data Formatting Programmer Guide representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR
characters less than the minimum are ignored. The default is 003.

OCR Minimum Characters

OCR Maximum Characters

Parameter # 690 (SSI # F1 B2h)
To select the maximum number of OCR characters (including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
bar code, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the Numeric Keypad from the Advanced
Data Formatting Programmer Guide representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR
characters greater than the maximum are ignored. The default is 100.

OCR Maximum Characters

OCR Security Level

Parameter # 554 (SSI # F1 2Ah)
To select the OCR decoding security/confidence level, scan the following bar code, then scan a two-digit
number from the Numeric Keypad from the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide representing the
level of confidence. Greater numbers minimize OCR decoding errors but reduce performance. Setting a value
that is too high can result in failure to decode. Setting a value that is too low can cause decoding errors. The
range of the security level is 10 - 90 and the default is 80.

OCR Security Level

11 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR Subset
Parameter # 686 (SSI # F1 AEh)
Set an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant. For example, if
scanning only numbers and the letters A, B, and C, create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding.
This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts.

To set or modify the OCR font subset, first enable the appropriate OCR font(s). Next, scan the following bar
code, then scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from the Alphanumeric Keyboard from the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide. Then scan End of Message from the Advanced Data
Formatting Programmer Guide.

OCR Subset

To cancel an OCR subset, for OCR-A or OCR-B, scan OCR-A variant Full ASCII, or OCR-B variant Full ASCII.

For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number, create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that
character set, or scan an option from the Set Default Parameter on page 6-5 and re-program the imager.

OCR Quiet Zone

Parameter # 695 (SSI # F1h B7h)
This option sets the OCR quiet zone. The DS457 stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide
blank space. The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option. Used with parsers that tolerate
slanted characters, the End of Field count is roughly a count of 8 for a character width. For example if set to 15,
then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser. Larger end of field numbers require bigger
quiet zones at each end of text line.

To set a quiet zone, scan the following bar code, then scan a two-digit number using the Numeric Keypad from
the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide. The range of the quiet zone is 20 - 99 and the default is 50,
indicating a six character width quiet zone.

OCR Quiet Zone

 OCR Reading 11 - 15

OCR Bright Illumination

Parameter # 701 (SSI # F1h BDh)
When enabled, image contrast is improved for OCR scanning. Zebra recommends enabling this when the
OCR string is longer than 20 characters, and for applications with busy backgrounds such as passport, check,
or VISA reading.

Enable OCR Bright Illumination

(1)

*Disable OCR Bright Illumination

(0)

NOTE Enabling OCR Bright Illumination causes the aiming pattern to blink due to the lower frame rate setting.
11 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR Template
Parameter # 547 (SSI # F1 23h)
This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format.
Carefully constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors.

To set or modify the OCR decode template, scan the OCR Template bar code, then bar codes corresponding
to numbers and letters on the following pages to form the template expression. Then scan End of Message.
The default is 54R which accepts any character OCR strings.

OCR Template

End of Message

Required Digit (9)

Only a numeric character is allowed in this position.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

99999 12987 30517 123AB

Required Alpha (A)

Only an alpha character is allowed in this position.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

AAA ABC WXY 12F
 OCR Reading 11 - 17

Require and Suppress (0)

It is required that any character in this position, including space or reject, is suppressed from the output.

Template Incoming data Output

990AA 12QAB 12AB

Optional Alphanumeric (1)

When this option appears in the template string, the data validator accepts an alphanumeric character if
present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

99991 1234A 12345 1234<

Optional Alpha (2)

When this option appears in the template string, the data validator accepts an alpha character if present.
Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

AAAA2 ABCDE WXYZ ABCD6

Alpha or Digit (3)

The data validator requires an alphanumeric character in this position to validate the incoming data.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

33333 12ABC WXY34 12AB<
11 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Any Including Space & Reject (4)

The template accepts any character in this position, including space and reject. Rejects are represented as an
underscore (_) in the output. This is a good selection for troubleshooting.

Template Valid data Valid data

99499 12$34 34_98

Any except Space & Reject (5)

The template accepts any character in this position except a space or reject.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

55999 A.123 *Z456 A BCD

Optional Digit (7)

When this option appears in the template string, the template accepts a numeric character if present. Optional
characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

99977 12345 789 789AB
 OCR Reading 11 - 19

Digit or Fill (8)

The data validator accepts any numeric or fill character in this position.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

88899 12345 >>789 <<789

Alpha or Fill (F)

The data validator accepts any alpha or fill character in this position.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

AAAFF ABCXY LMN>> ABC<5

Required Space ( )

Space

When this option appears in the template string, the template accepts a space if present. Optional characters
are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.

Template Valid data Invalid data

99 99 12 34 67891
11 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Optional Small Special (.)

When this option appears in the template string, the data validator accepts a special character if present.
Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. Small special
characters are - , and .

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

AA.99 MN.35 XY98 XYZ12

Other Template Operators

These template operators assist in capturing, delimiting, and formatting scanned OCR data.

Literal String (" and +)

Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the Alphanumeric Keyboard from the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide to define a literal string within a template that must be present
in scanned OCR data. There are two characters used to delimit required literal strings; if one of the delimiter
characters is present in the desired literal string, use the other delimiter.

Template Valid data Invalid data

"35+BC" 35+BC AB+22
 OCR Reading 11 - 21

New Line (E)

To create a template of multiple lines, add E between the template of each single line.

Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data

999EAAAA 321 987 XYZW
BCAD ZXYW 12

String Extract (C)

This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data. The string
extract is structured as follows:

CbPe

Where:

• C is the string extract operator

• b is the string begin delimiter
• P is a single template character representing all string characters to be extracted
• e is the string end delimiter
Values for b and e can be any scannable character. They are included in the output stream.

Template Incoming data Output

C>A> XQ3>ABCDE> >ABCDE>
->ATHRUZ>123 >ATHRUZ>
1ABCZXYZ No Output
11 - 22 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Ignore to End of Field (D)

This operator causes all characters after a template to be ignored. Use this as the last character in a template
expression. Examples for the template 999D:

Template Incoming data Output

999D 123-PED 123
357298 357
193 193

Skip Until (P1)

This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected. It can
be used in two ways:

P1ct

Where:

• P1 is the Skip Until operator

• c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
• t is one or more template characters
P1"s"t

Where:

• P1 is the Skip Until operator

• "s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 11-20) that trigger the
start of output
• t is one or more template characters
 OCR Reading 11 - 23

The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator, and the first character in
the template should accommodate this trigger.

Template Incoming data Output

P1"PN"AA9999 123PN9876 PN9876
PN1234 PN1234
X-PN3592 PN3592

Skip Until Not (P0)

This operator allows skipping over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in
the output stream. It can be used in two ways:

P0ct

Where:

• P0 is the Skip Until Not operator

• c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
• t is one or more template characters
P0"s"t

Where:

• P0 is the Skip Until Not operator

• "s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 11-20) that trigger the
start of output
• t is one or more template characters
11 - 24 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator.

Template Incoming data Output

P0A9999 BPN3456 3456
PN1234 1234
5341 5341

Template Incoming data Output

P0"PN"9999 PN3456 3456
5341 5341
PNPN7654 7654

Repeat Previous (R)

This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times, allowing the capture of variable-length
scanned data. The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required
digits:

Template Incoming data Output

AA9R AB3 AB3
PN12345 PN12345
32RM52700 No output

Scroll Until Match (S)

This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template.

Template Incoming data Output

S99999 AB3 No Output
PN12345 12345
32RM52700 52700
 OCR Reading 11 - 25

Multiple Templates
This feature sets up multiple templates for OCR decoding. To do this, follow the procedure described in OCR
Template on page 11-16 (scan the OCR Template bar code, then bar codes corresponding to numbers and
letters to form the template expression, then End of Message) for each template in the multiple template string,
using a capital letter X as a separator between the templates.

For example, set the OCR Template as 99999XAAAAA to decode OCR strings of either 12345 or ABCDE.

Template Examples
Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition.
Field Definition Description
"M"99977 M followed by three digits and two optional digits.
"X"997777"X" X followed by two digits, four optional digits, and an X.
9959775599 Two digits followed by any character, a digit, two optional digits, any two
characters, and two digits.
A55"-"999"-"99 A letter followed by two characters, a dash, three digits, a dash, and two digits.
33A"."99 Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter, a period, and two digits.
999992991 Five digits followed by an optional alpha, two digits, and an optional alphanumeric.
"PN98" Literal field - PN98

OCR Check Digit Modulus

Parameter # 688 (SSI # F1h B0h)
This option sets OCR module check digit calculation. The check digit is the last digit (in the rightmost position)
in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the collected data. The check digit is the end product of a
calculation made on the incoming data. For check digit calculation, for example Modulus 10, alpha and
numeric characters are assigned numeric weights (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 11-26). The
calculation is applied to the character weights and the resulting check digit is added to the end of the data. If
the incoming data does not match the check digit, the data is considered corrupt.

The selected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation.

To choose the Check Digit Modulus, such as 10 for modulo 10, scan the following bar code, then scan a
three-digit number from 001 to 099 representing the check digit using the Numeric Keypad from the Advanced
Data Formatting Programmer Guide. The default is 1.

OCR Check Digit

11 - 26 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

OCR Check Digit Multiplier

Parameter # 700 (SSI # F1h BCh)
This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for the character positions. For check digit validation, each
character in scanned data has an equivalent weight used in the check digit calculation. DS457 OCR ships with
the following weight equivalents:

0=0 A = 10 K = 20 U = 30
1=1 B = 11 L = 21 V = 31
2=2 C = 12 M = 22 W = 32
3=3 D = 13 N = 23 X = 33
4=4 E = 14 O = 24 Y = 34
5=5 F = 15 P = 25 Z = 35
6=6 G = 16 Q = 26 Space = 0
7=7 H = 17 R = 27
8=8 I = 18 S = 28
9=9 J = 19 T = 29
All other characters are equivalent to one (1).

You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default.

121212121212 (default)
123456789A (for ISBN, Product Add Right to Left. See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 11-27)

For example:

ISBN 0 2 0 1 1 8 3 9 9 4
Multiplier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Product 0 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4
Product add 0+ 18+ 0+ 7+ 6+ 40+ 12+ 27+ 18+ 4= 132

ISBN uses modulo 11 for its check digit. In this case, 132 is divisible by 11, so it passes the check digit.

To set the check digit multiplier, scan the following bar code, then scan numbers and letters to form the
multiplier string from the Alphanumeric Keyboard from the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Then scan End of Message from the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.

OCR Check Digit Multiplier

 OCR Reading 11 - 27

OCR Check Digit Validation

Parameter # 694 (SSI # F1h B6h)
Use OCR Check Digit Validation to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme.
The following is a list of options.

None
No check digit validation, indicating no check digit is applied. This is the default.

*No Check Digit

(0)

Product Add Left to Right

Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page
11-26). Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the
multiplier, and the sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit
Modulus is zero.

Example:

Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)

Check digit multiplier string is 123456

Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6
Product 1 6 6 16 25 36
Product add 1+ 6+ 6+ 16+ 25+ 36= 90

The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is zero).

Product Add Left to Right

(3)
11 - 28 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Product Add Right to Left

Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page
11-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data
is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit
Modulus is zero.

Example:

Scanned data numeric value is 132459 (check digit is 9)

Check digit multiplier string is 123456

Digit 1 3 2 4 5 9
Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1
Product 6 15 8 12 10 9
Product add 6+ 15+ 8+ 12+ 10+ 9= 60

The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).

Product Add Right to Left

(1)

Digit Add Left to Right

Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page
11-26). Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the
multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of
the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.

Example:

Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)

Check digit multiplier string is 123456

Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6
Product 1 6 6 16 25 36
Digit add 1+ 6+ 6+ 1+6+ 2+5+ 3+6= 36

The Check Digit Modulus is 12. It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 (the remainder is 0).

Digit Add Left to Right

(4)
 OCR Reading 11 - 29

Digit Add Right to Left

Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page
11-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data
is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes
if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.

Example:

Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)

Check digit multiplier string is 123456

Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1
Product 6 15 8 12 10 6
Digit add 6+ 1+5+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0+ 6= 30

The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).

Digit Add Right to Left

(2)

Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder

Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page
11-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data
is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of these products except for the check digit's product is computed. The check digit
passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.

Example:

Scanned data numeric value is 122456 (check digit is 6)

Check digit multiplier string is 123456

Digit 1 2 2 4 5 6
Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1
Product 6 10 8 12 10 6
Product add 6+ 10+ 8+ 12+ 10= 46 6

The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6.

Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder

(5)
11 - 30 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder

Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page
11-26). The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data
is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit's product is then
calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.

Example:

Scanned data numeric value is 122459 (check digit is 6)

Check digit multiplier string is 123456

Digit 1 2 2 4 5 9
Multiplier 6 5 4 3 2 1
Product 6 10 8 12 10 9
Digit add 6+ 1+0+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0= 19 9

The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9.

10

Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder

(6)

Health Industry - HIBCC43

This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard.

Health Industry - HIBCC43

(9)
 OCR Reading 11 - 31

Inverse OCR
Parameter # 856 (SSI # F2h 58h)
Inverse OCR is white or light words on a black or dark background. Select an option for decoding inverse OCR:

• Regular Only - decode regular OCR (black on white) strings only.

• Inverse Only - decode inverse OCR (white on black) strings only.
• Autodiscriminate - decodes both regular and inverse OCR strings.

*Regular Only
(0)

Inverse Only
(1)

Autodiscriminate
(2)
11 - 32 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
CHAPTER 12 SYMBOLOGIES

Introduction
This chapter describes symbology features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these
features. Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started.

The imager is shipped with the settings shown in the Symbology Default Table on page 12-2 (also see
Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values
suit requirements, programming is not necessary.

There are two ways to change a parameter value:

• Scan the appropriate bar codes in this guide. These new values replace the standard default values in
memory.
• For SSI and USB SNAPI hosts, send a “parameter send” command from the host system. Hexadecimal
parameter numbers are shown in this chapter below the parameter title, and options are shown in
parenthesis beneath the accompanying bar codes. See the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s
Guide for detailed instructions for changing parameter values using this method.

NOTE Most computer monitors allow scanning the bar codes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where the bar code can be seen clearly, and
bars and/or spaces are not merging.

To return all features to default values, scan Set Default Parameter on page 6-5. Throughout the programming
bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).

* Indicates Default *Enable UPC-A Feature’/Option

(0)
12 - 2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data
without the UPC-A check digit, simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit
UPC-A Check Digit on page 12-17. The imager issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying
a successful parameter entry.

Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 require scanning several bar codes. See the individual
parameter, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, for this procedure.

Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.

Symbology Parameter Defaults

Table 12-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar
code(s) provided in the Symbologies Parameters section beginning on page 12-9.

NOTE See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, and miscellaneous default
parameters.

Table 12-1 Symbology Default Table

Parameter Parameter SSI Default Page

Number Number Number

Disable All Symbologies N/A N/A N/A 12-8

UPC/EAN

UPC-A 1 01h Enable 12-9

UPC-E 2 02h Enable 12-9

UPC-E1 12 0Ch Disable 12-10

EAN-8/JAN 8 4 04h Enable 12-10

EAN-13/JAN 13 3 03h Enable 12-11

Bookland EAN 83 53h Disable 12-11

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals 16 10h Ignore 12-12

(2 and 5 digits)

User-Programmable Supplementals 12-15

Supplemental 1: 579 F1h 43h
Supplemental 2: 580 F1h 44h

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80 50h 10 12-15

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format 672 F1h A0h Combined 12-16

 Symbologies 12 - 3

Table 12-1 Symbology Default Table (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page

Parameter Default
Number Number Number

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 40 28h Enable 12-17

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 41 29h Enable 12-17

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 42 2Ah Enable 12-18

UPC-A Preamble 34 22h System Character 12-19

UPC-E Preamble 35 23h System Character 12-20

UPC-E1 Preamble 36 24h System Character 12-21

Convert UPC-E to A 37 25h Disable 12-22

Convert UPC-E1 to A 38 26h Disable 12-22

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend 39 27h Disable 12-23

Bookland ISBN Format 576 F1h 40h ISBN-10 12-24

UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 55h Disable 12-25

Coupon Report 730 F1h DAh New Coupon 12-26

Format

ISSN EAN 617 F1h 69h Disable 12-27

Code 128

Code 128 8 08h Enable 12-28

Set Length(s) for Code 128 209, 210 D1h, D2h Any Length 12-28

GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14 0Eh Enable 12-30

ISBT 128 84 54h Enable 12-30

ISBT Concatenation 577 F1h 41h Disable 12-31

Check ISBT Table 578 F1h 42h Enable 12-32

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 DFh 10 12-32

Code 128 Security Level 751 F3h EFh Security Level 1 12-33

Code 39

Code 39 0 00h Enable 12-34

Trioptic Code 39 13 0Dh Disable 12-34

Convert Code 39 to Code 32 86 56h Disable 12-35

(Italian Pharmacy Code)

Code 32 Prefix 231 E7h Disable 12-35

Set Length(s) for Code 39 18, 19 12h, 13h 2 to 55 12-36

Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48 30h Disable 12-37

12 - 4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 12-1 Symbology Default Table (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page

Parameter Default
Number Number Number

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 2Bh Disable 12-48

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 11h Disable 12-38

Buffer Code 39 113 71h Disable 12-39

Code 39 Security Level 750 F3h EEh Security Level 1 12-42

Code 93

Code 93 9 09h Disable 12-43

Set Length(s) for Code 93 26, 27 1Ah, 1Bh 4 to 55 12-43

Code 11

Code 11 10 0Ah Disable 12-45

Set Lengths for Code 11 28, 29 1Ch, 1Dh 4 to 55 12-45

Code 11 Check Digit Verification 52 34h Disable 12-47

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47 2Fh Disable 12-48

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 6 06h Enable 12-48

Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 22, 23 16h, 17h Range 6 - 55 12-49

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 31h Disable 12-50

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 2Ch Disable 12-51

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 82 52h Disable 12-51

I 2 of 5 Security Level 1121 Security Level 1 12-52

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)

Discrete 2 of 5 5 05h Disable 12-53

Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 20, 21 14h 15h 12 12-53

Codabar (NW - 7)

Codabar 7 07h Disable 12-55

Set Lengths for Codabar 24, 25 18h, 19h 5 to 55 12-55

CLSI Editing 54 36h Disable 12-57

NOTIS Editing 55 37h Disable 12-57

Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop 855 F2h 57h Upper Case 12-58
Characters Transmission
 Symbologies 12 - 5

Table 12-1 Symbology Default Table (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page

Parameter Default
Number Number Number

MSI

MSI 11 0Bh Disable 12-59

Set Length(s) for MSI 30, 31 1Eh, 1Fh 4 to 55 12-59

MSI Check Digits 50 32h One 12-61

Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 2Eh Disable 12-62

MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 12-62

Chinese 2 of 5

Chinese 2 of 5 408 F0h 98h Disable 12-63

Matrix 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5 618 F1h 6Ah Disable 12-63

Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 619, 620 F1h 6Bh 1 Length: 14 12-64

F1h 6Ch

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 F1h 6Eh Disable 12-65

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 F1h 6Fh Disable 12-65

Korean 3 of 5

Korean 3 of 5 581 F1h 45h Disable 12-66

Inverse 1D 586 F1h 4Ah DS457-SR/HD/DL: 12-67

Regular
DS457-DP:
Inverse Autodetect

Postal Codes

US Postnet 89 59h Disable 12-68

US Planet 90 5Ah Disable 12-68

Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 5Fh Enable 12-69

UK Postal 91 5Bh Disable 12-69

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 60h Enable 12-70

Japan Postal 290 F0h 22h Disable 12-70

Australia Post 291 F0h 23h Disable 12-71

Australia Post Format 718 F1h CEh Autodiscriminate 12-72

Netherlands KIX Code 326 F0h 46h Disable 12-73

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail 592 F1h 50h Disable 12-74

UPU FICS Postal 611 F1h 63h Disable 12-74

12 - 6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table 12-1 Symbology Default Table (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page

Parameter Default
Number Number Number

GS1 DataBar (formerly RSS, Reduced Space Symbology)

GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, 338 F0h 52h Enable 12-75
GS1 DataBar Truncated,
GS1 DataBar Stacked,
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional)

GS1 DataBar Limited 339 F0h 53h Enable 12-76

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 728 F1h D8h 3 12-77

GS1 DataBar Expanded (GS1 DataBar 340 F0h 54h Enable 12-78
Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked)

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN 397 F0h 8Dh Disable 12-78

Composite

Composite CC-C 341 F0h 55h Disable 12-79

Composite CC-A/B 342 F0h 56h Disable 12-79

Composite TLC-39 371 F0h 73h Disable 12-80

UPC Composite Mode 344 F0h 58h Never Linked 12-81

Composite Beep Mode 398 F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code 12-82
Type is Decoded

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN 427 F0h ABh Disable 12-82
Composite Codes

2D Symbologies

PDF417 15 0Fh Enable 12-83

MicroPDF417 227 E3h Disable 12-83

Code 128 Emulation 123 7Bh Disable 12-84

Data Matrix 292 F0h 24h Enable 12-85

Data Matrix Inverse 588 F1h 4Ch DS457-SR/HD/DL: 12-86

Regular
DS457-DP:
Inverse Autodetect

Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only) 537 F1h 19h Auto 12-87

Maxicode 294 F0h 26h Disable 12-88

QR Code 293 F0h 25h Enable 12-88

QR Inverse 587 F1h 4Bh Regular 12-89

MicroQR 573 F1h 3Dh Enable 12-90

 Symbologies 12 - 7

Table 12-1 Symbology Default Table (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page

Parameter Default
Number Number Number

Aztec 574 F1h 3Eh Enable 12-90

Aztec Inverse 589 F1h 4Dh Inverse Autodetect 12-91

Symbology-Specific Security Levels

Redundancy Level 78 4Eh 1 12-92

Security Level 77 4Dh 1 12-94

Intercharacter Gap Size 381 F0h 7Dh Normal 12-95

Macro PDF

Macro PDF Transmit/Decode Mode Symbols 188 BCh Passthrough Mode 12-97

Transmit Macro PDF Control Header 184 B8h Disable 12-98

Escape Characters 233 E9h N/A 12-98

Flush Macro PDF Buffer N/A N/A N/A 12-99

Abort Macro PDF Entry N/A N/A N/A 12-99

12 - 8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Disable All Symbologies

Scan the bar code below to disable the decoding of all symbologies. Use this to simplify selecting a single
symbology to decode by scanning this, then scanning the desired enable code type bar code. Note that the
imager can still decode parameter bar codes.

Disable All Symbologies

 Symbologies 12 - 9

UPC/EAN
Enable/Disable UPC-A
Parameter # 1 (SSI # 01h)
To enable or disable UPC-A, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable UPC-A
(1)

Disable UPC-A
(0)

Enable/Disable UPC-E
Parameter # 2 (SSI # 02h)
To enable or disable UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable UPC-E
(1)

Disable UPC-E
(0)
12 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Enable/Disable UPC-E1
Parameter # 12 (SSI # 0Ch)
UPC-E1 is disabled by default.

To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below.

NOTE UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.

Enable UPC-E1
(1)

*Disable UPC-E1
(0)

Enable/Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
Parameter # 4 (SSI # 04h)
To enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(1)

Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 11

Enable/Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
Parameter # 3 (SSI # 03h)
To enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(1)

Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
(0)

Enable/Disable Bookland EAN

Parameter # 83 (SSI # 53h)
To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Bookland EAN

(1)

*Disable Bookland EAN

(0)

NOTE If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 12-24. Also select either Decode
UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental
Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 12-12.
12 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

Parameter # 16 (SSI # 10h)
Supplementals are bar codes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2,
EAN 13+2). The following options are available:

• If you select Ignore UPC/EAN with Supplementals, and the imager is presented with a UPC/EAN
plus supplemental symbol, the imager decodes UPC/EAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
• If you select Decode UPC/EAN with Supplementals, the imager only decodes UPC/EAN symbols with
supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
• If you select Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, the imager decodes UPC/EAN symbols with
supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the imager must
decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page
12-15 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
• If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options, the imager immediately transmits EAN-13
bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a
supplemental, the imager must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-15 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no
supplemental. The imager transmits UPC/EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately.
• Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.

NOTE If you select 978 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see Enable/Disable
Bookland EAN on page 12-11 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format
on page 12-24.

• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed
previously.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit
user-defined prefix. Set this 3-digit prefix using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 12-15.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either
of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the 3-digit prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals
on page 12-15.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any
prefix listed previously or the user-defined prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on
page 12-15.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with
any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable
Supplementals on page 12-15.

NOTE To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental
characters.
 Symbologies 12 - 13

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals

(1)

*Ignore Supplementals
(0)

Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

(2)

Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

(4)

Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode

(5)

Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

(7)
12 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)

Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode

(6)

Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

(8)

Enable Smart Supplemental Mode

(3)

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1

(9)

Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2

(10)

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1

(11)

Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2

(12)
 Symbologies 12 - 15

User-Programmable Supplementals

Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579 (SSI # F1h 43h)

Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580 (SSI # F1h 44h)

If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on
page 12-12, select User-Programmable Supplemental 1 to set the 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits
using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. Select User-Programmable Supplemental
2 to set a second 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning in Appendix D,
Numeric Bar Codes.

User-Programmable Supplemental 1

User-Programmable Supplemental 2

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

Parameter # 80 (SSI # 50h)
With Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals selected, this option adjusts the number of times a
symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or
above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals, and
the autodiscriminate option is selected. The default is set at 10.

Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D,
Numeric Bar Codes. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. To correct an error or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page D-3.

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

12 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format

Parameter # 672 (SSI # F1h A0h)
Select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes with Supplementals with Transmit Code ID
Character on page 6-37 set to AIM Code ID Character:

• Separate - transmit UPC/EAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs but one transmission, i.e.:
]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
• Combined – transmit UPC/EAN with supplementals with one AIM ID and one transmission, i.e.:
]E3<data+supplemental data>
• Separate Transmissions - transmit UPC/EAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate
transmissions, i.e.:
]E<0 or 4><data>
]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]

Separate
(0)

*Combined
(1)

Separate Transmissions
(2)
 Symbologies 12 - 17

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Parameter # 40 (SSI # 28h)
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate
bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to
guarantee the integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(0)

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Parameter # 41 (SSI # 29h)
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate
bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to
guarantee the integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(0)
12 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

Parameter # 42 (SSI # 2Ah)
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate
bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to
guarantee the integrity of the data.

*Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 19

UPC-A Preamble
Parameter # 34 (SSI # 22h)
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are
three options for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit
System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to
match the host system.

No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)

*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER>
<DATA>)
(2)
12 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

UPC-E Preamble
Parameter # 35 (SSI # 23h)
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are
three options for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit
System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to
match the host system.

No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)

*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER>
<DATA>)
(2)
 Symbologies 12 - 21

UPC-E1 Preamble
Parameter # 36 (SSI # 24h)
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. There are
three options for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit
System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and transmit no preamble. Select the appropriate option to
match the host system.

No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)

*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)

System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER>
<DATA>)
(2)
12 - 22 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A

Parameter # 37 (SSI # 25h)
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After
conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,
Check Digit).

When disabled, UPC-E decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E data, without conversion.

Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A

Parameter # 38 (SSI # 26h)
Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data
follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).

When disabled, UPC-E1 decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.

Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 23

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend
Parameter # 39 (SSI # 27h)
When enabled, this parameter adds five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in
format to EAN-13 symbols.

When disabled, EAN-8 symbols are transmitted as is.

Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(1)

*Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(0)
12 - 24 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Bookland ISBN Format

Parameter # 576 (SSI # F1h 40h)
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 12-11, select one of the following
formats for Bookland data:

• Bookland ISBN-10 - The imager reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format
with the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered
Bookland in this mode.
• Bookland ISBN-13 - The imager reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in
13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.

*Bookland ISBN-10
(0)

Bookland ISBN-13
(1)

NOTE For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN
on page 12-11, then select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN
Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on
page 12-12.
 Symbologies 12 - 25

UCC Coupon Extended Code

Parameter # 85 (SSI # 55h)
When enabled, this parameter decodes UPC-A bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes starting with
digit ‘99’, and UPC-A/EAN-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13, and EAN-128 must be enabled to scan all
types of Coupon Codes.

Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(1)

*Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(0)

NOTE Use the Decode UPC/EAN Supplemental Redundancy parameter to control autodiscrimination of the
EAN128 (right half) of a coupon code.
12 - 26 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Coupon Report
Parameter # 730 (SSI # F1h DAh)
Traditional coupon symbols (old coupon symbols) are composed of two bar codes: UPC/EAN and Code128. A
new coupon symbol is composed of a single Databar Expanded bar code. The new coupon format offers more
options for purchase values (up to $999.99) and supports complex discount offers such as a second purchase
requirement.

An interim coupon symbol also exists that contains both types of bar codes: UPC/EAN and Databar Expanded.
This format accommodates both retailers that do not recognize or use the additional information included in the
new coupon symbol, as well as those who can process new coupon symbols.

Scan a bar code below to select one of the following options for decoding coupon symbols:

• Old Coupon Format - Scanning an old coupon symbol reports both the UPC and Code 128 portion of the
symbol if both are present in the field of view. The imager may report either the UPC or the Code 128 if
only one is within the field of view or is readable. UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page
12-15 controls the number of times the imager attempts to decode the entire symbol before transmission.
Additionally, scanning an interim coupon symbol reports UPC, and scanning a new coupon symbol
reports nothing (no decode).
• New Coupon Format - Scanning an old coupon symbol reports either UPC or Code 128, and scanning an
interim coupon symbol or a new coupon symbol reports Databar Expanded.
• Both Coupon Formats - Scanning an old coupon symbol reports both the UPC and Code 128 portion of
the symbol if both are present in the field of view. The imager may report either the UPC or the Code 128
if only one is within the field of view or is readable. UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page
12-15 controls the number of times the imager attempts to decode the entire symbol before transmission.
Additionally, scanning an interim coupon symbol or a new coupon symbol reports Databar Expanded.

Old Coupon Format

(0)

*New Coupon Format

(1)

Both Coupon Formats

(2)
 Symbologies 12 - 27

ISSN EAN
Parameter # 617 (SSI # F1h 69h)
To enable or disable ISSN EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable ISSN EAN

(1)

*Disable ISSN EAN

(0)
12 - 28 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Code 128
Enable/Disable Code 128
Parameter # 8 (SSI # 08h)
To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable Code 128

(1)

Disable Code 128

(0)

Set Lengths for Code 128

Parameter # L1 = 209 (SSI # D1h), L2 = 210 (SSI # D2h)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within
a specific range.

NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types by scanning single digit numbers, single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected
length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example,
to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, then scan
1 followed by 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of
two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes.
For example, to decode only those Code 128 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code
128 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 128 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 128 - Length
Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading
zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters
within the imager’s capability.
 Symbologies 12 - 29

Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)

Code 128 - One Discrete Length

Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 128 - Length Within Range

*Code 128 - Any Length

12 - 30 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Enable/Disable GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)

Parameter # 14 (SSI # 0Eh)
To enable or disable GS1-128, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable GS1-128
(1)

Disable GS1-128
(0)

Enable/Disable ISBT 128

Parameter # 84 (SSI # 54h)
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan a bar code below to enable or disable
ISBT 128. If necessary, the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data.

*Enable ISBT 128

(1)

Disable ISBT 128

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 31

ISBT Concatenation
Parameter # 577 (SSI # F1h 41h)
Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:

• If you select Disable ISBT Concatenation, the imager does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it
encounters.
• If you select Enable ISBT Concatenation, there must be two ISBT codes in order for the imager to
decode and perform concatenation. The imager does not decode single ISBT symbols.
• If you select Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation, the imager decodes and concatenates pairs of
ISBT codes immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the imager must decode the symbol the
number of times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 12-32 before transmitting its data to
confirm that there is no additional ISBT symbol.

*Disable ISBT Concatenation

(0)

Enable ISBT Concatenation

(1)

Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation

(2)
12 - 32 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Check ISBT Table

Parameter # 578 (SSI # F1h 42h)
The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT bar codes that are commonly used in
pairs. If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs
found in this table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.

*Enable Check ISBT Table

(1)

Disable Check ISBT Table

(0)

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

Parameter # 223 (SSI # DFh)
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate, use this parameter to set the number of times the imager
must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol.

Scan the bar code below, then scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes to set a value
between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page D-3. The default is 10.

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

 Symbologies 12 - 33

Code 128 Security Level

Parameter # 751 (SSI # F3h EFh)
Code 128 bar codes are vulnerable to misdecodes by the nature of the symbol, especially when Any Length is
set for Code 128 bar codes. The imager offers four levels of decode security for Code 128 bar codes. There is
an inverse relationship between security and imager aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security may
result in reduced aggressiveness in scanning, so select only the level of security necessary.

• Code 128 Security Level 0: This setting allows the imager to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding the most in-spec bar codes.
• Code 128 Security Level 1: A bar code must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety
requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Code 128 Security Level 2: Select this option with higher safety requirements to the bar codes if
Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Code 128Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A bar code must be successfully read three
times before being decoded.

NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes.
Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the imager. If this level of
security is required, it is recommended that you try to improve the quality of the bar codes.

Code 128Security Level 0

(0)

*Code 128 Security Level 1

(1)

Code 128 Security Level 2

(2)

Code 128 Security Level 3

(3)
12 - 34 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Code 39
Enable/Disable Code 39
Parameter # 0 (SSI # 00h)
To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable Code 39
(1)

Disable Code 39
(0)

Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39

Parameter # 13 (SSI # 0Dh)
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39
symbols always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code
below.

Enable Trioptic Code 39

(1)

*Disable Trioptic Code 39

(0)

NOTE Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously.
 Symbologies 12 - 35

Convert Code 39 to Code 32

Parameter # 86 (SSI # 56h)
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code
below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.

NOTE Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(1)

*Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(0)

Code 32 Prefix
Parameter # 231 (SSI # E7h)
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar
codes.

NOTE Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Enable Code 32 Prefix

(1)

*Disable Code 32 Prefix

(0)
12 - 36 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for Code 39

Parameter # L1 = 18 (SSI # 12h), L2 = 19 (SSI # 13h)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within
a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred
options.

NOTE When setting lengths for different bar code types by scanning single digit numbers, single digit numbers
must always be preceded by a leading zero.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1
followed by 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 -
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection,
scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length
Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading
zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within
the imager’s capability.

Code 39 - One Discrete Length

Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths

 Symbologies 12 - 37

Set Lengths for Code 39 (continued)

Code 39 - Length Within Range

Code 39 - Any Length

Code 39 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 48 (SSI # 30h)
When this feature is enabled, the imager checks the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data
complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are
decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.

Enable Code 39 Check Digit

(1)

*Disable Code 39 Check Digit

(0)
12 - 38 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit

Parameter # 43 (SSI # 2Bh)
Scan a bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)

NOTE Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Parameter # 17 (SSI # 11h)
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To
enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 39 Full ASCII

(1)

*Disable Code 39 Full ASCII

(0)

NOTE Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously.

Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII
Character Set Table for the appropriate interface. See Appendix E, ASCII Character Set.
 Symbologies 12 - 39

Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store)

Parameter # 113 (SSI # 71h)
This feature allows the imager to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols.

Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading
space as a first character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered.

Decode of a valid Code 39 symbol with no leading space causes transmission in sequence of all buffered data
in a first-in first-out format, plus transmission of the “triggering” symbol. See the following pages for further
details.

When the Do Not Buffer Code 39 option is selected, all decoded Code 39 symbols are transmitted
immediately without being stored in the buffer.

This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39, we recommend configuring the imager to
decode Code 39 symbology only.

Buffer Code 39 (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Buffer Code 39 (Disable)

(0)

While there is data in the transmission buffer, selecting Do Not Buffer Code 39 is not allowed. The buffer
holds 128 bytes of information.

To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission
(see Transmit Buffer on page 12-40) or clear the buffer.

Buffer Data
To buffer data, Code 39 buffering must be enabled and a Code 39 symbol must be read with a space
immediately following the start pattern.

• Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the imager issues a lo/hi beep to indicate successful
decode and buffering. (For overflow conditions, see Overfilling Transmission Buffer.)
• The imager adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer.
• No transmission occurs.
12 - 40 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Clear Transmission Buffer

To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a
dash (minus), and a stop character.

• The imager issues a short hi/lo/hi beep.

• The imager erases the transmission buffer.
• No transmission occurs.

Clear Buffer

NOTE The Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character. In order to scan this command, be sure
Code 39 length is set to include length 1.

Transmit Buffer
There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer.

1. Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below. Only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop character.
• The imager transmits and clears the buffer.
• The imager issues a Lo/Hi beep.

Transmit Buffer

2. Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space.
• The imager appends new decode data to buffered data.
• The imager transmits and clears the buffer.
• The imager signals that the buffer was transmitted with a lo/hi beep.
• The imager transmits and clears the buffer.

NOTE The Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character. In order to scan this command, be sure Code 39
length is set to include length 1.
 Symbologies 12 - 41

Overfilling Transmission Buffer

The Code 39 buffer holds 128 characters. If the symbol just read results in an overflow of the transmission
buffer:

• The imager indicates that the symbol was rejected by issuing three long, high beeps.
• No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected.

Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer

If the symbol just read was the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty:

• A short lo/hi/lo beep signals that the buffer is empty.

• No transmission occurs.
• The buffer remains empty.
12 - 42 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Code 39 Security Level

Parameter # 750 (SSI # F3h EEh)
The imager offers four levels of decode security for Code 39. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing
levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and imager aggressiveness, so
choose only that level of security necessary for any given application.

• Code 39 Security Level 0: This setting allows the imager to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes.
• Code 39 Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Code 39 Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Code 39 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level. Be advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely
out of spec bar codes. Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the
imager. If you need this level of security, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.

Code 39 Security Level 0

(0)

*Code 39 Security Level 1

(1)

Code 39 Security Level 2

(2)

Code 39 Security Level 3

(3)
 Symbologies 12 - 43

Code 93
Enable/Disable Code 93
Parameter # 9 (SSI # 09h)
To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 93
(1)

*Disable Code 93
(0)

Set Lengths for Code 93

Parameter # L1 = 26 (SSI # 1Ah), L2 = 27 (SSI # 1Bh)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within
a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1
followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 -
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example,
to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length
Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading
zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within
the imager’s capability.
12 - 44 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)

Code 93 - One Discrete Length

Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 93 - Length Within Range

Code 93 - Any Length

 Symbologies 12 - 45

Code 11
Code 11
Parameter # 10 (SSI # 0Ah)
To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Code 11
(1)

*Disable Code 11
(0)

Set Lengths for Code 11

Parameter # L1 = 28 (SSI # 1Ch), L2 = 29 (SSI # 1Dh)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within
a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1
followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 -
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To
correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within
the imager’s capability.
12 - 46 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)

Code 11 - One Discrete Length

Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths

Code 11 - Length Within Range

Code 11 - Any Length

 Symbologies 12 - 47

Code 11 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 52 (SSI # 34h)
This feature allows the imager to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with
the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code.
The options are to check for one check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature.

To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in the
Code 11 symbols.

*Disable
(0)

One Check Digit

(1)

Two Check Digits

(2)
12 - 48 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Transmit Code 11 Check Digits

Parameter # 47 (SSI # 2Fh)
This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)

NOTE Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
Parameter # 6 (SSI # 06h)
To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5
length from the following pages.

*Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(1)

Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 49

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5

Parameter # L1 = 22 (SSI # 16h), L2 = 23 (SSI # 17h)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a
specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1
followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection,
scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To
correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the
imager’s capability.

NOTE Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications.

I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

12 - 50 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)

I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

I 2 of 5 - Any Length

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 49 (SSI # 31h)
When this feature is enabled, the imager checks the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies
with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC)
check digit algorithm.

*Disable
(0)

USS Check Digit

(1)

OPCC Check Digit

(2)
 Symbologies 12 - 51

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 44 (SSI # 2Ch)
Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Parameter # 82 (SSI # 52h)
Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13.
To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid
EAN-13 check digit.

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)

(0)
12 - 52 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

I 2 of 5 Security Level
Parameter # 1121
Interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when I 2 of 5 Lengths is set to Any
Length. The imager offers four levels of decode security for Interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes. There is an inverse
relationship between security and imager aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning
aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.

• I 2 of 5 Security Level 0: This setting allows the imager to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec bar codes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 1: A bar code must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety
requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 2: Select this option with greater bar code security requirements if Security
Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A bar code must be successfully read three
times before being decoded.

NOTE Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec bar codes.
Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the imager. If this level of
security is required, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.

I 2 of 5 Security Level 0
(0)

*I 2 of 5 Security Level 1
(1)

I 2 of 5 Security Level 2
(2)

I 2 of 5 Security Level 3
(3)
 Symbologies 12 - 53

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5
Parameter # 5 (SSI # 05h)
To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Discrete 2 of 5
(1)

*Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(0)

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5

Parameter # L1 = 20 (SSI # 14h), L2 = 21 (SSI # 15h)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a
specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1
followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only those D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 -
Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within
Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To
correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within
the imager’s capability.
12 - 54 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)

NOTE Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of
the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To
prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5
applications.

D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

D 2 of 5 - Any Length
 Symbologies 12 - 55

Codabar (NW - 7)
Enable/Disable Codabar
Parameter # 7 (SSI # 07h)
To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Codabar
(1)

*Disable Codabar
(0)

Set Lengths for Codabar

Parameter # L1 = 24 (SSI # 18h), L2 = 25 (SSI # 19h)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within
a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1
followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two
Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection,
scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length
Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading
zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within
the imager’s capability.
12 - 56 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)

Codabar - One Discrete Length

Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths

Codabar - Length Within Range

Codabar - Any Length

 Symbologies 12 - 57

CLSI Editing
Parameter # 54 (SSI # 36h)
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and
tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if the host system requires this data
format.

NOTE Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.

Enable CLSI Editing

(1)

*Disable CLSI Editing

(0)

NOTIS Editing
Parameter # 55 (SSI # 37h)
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable
this feature if the host system requires this data format.

Enable NOTIS Editing

(1)

*Disable NOTIS Editing

(0)
12 - 58 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters Transmission

Parameter # 855 (SSI # F2h 57h)
Select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start/stop characters.

*Upper Case
(0)

Lower Case
(1)
 Symbologies 12 - 59

MSI
Enable/Disable MSI
Parameter # 11 (SSI # 0Bh)
To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable MSI
(1)

*Disable MSI
(0)

Set Lengths for MSI

Parameter # L1 = 30 (SSI # 1Eh), L2 = 31 (SSI # 1Fh)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a
specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length.
Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to
decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by
4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two
selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For
example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete
Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan
Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range.
Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode
MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range. Then
scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the
imager’s capability.
12 - 60 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for MSI (continued)

NOTE Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent
this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.

MSI - One Discrete Length

MSI - Two Discrete Lengths

MSI - Length Within Range

MSI - Any Length

 Symbologies 12 - 61

MSI Check Digits

Parameter # 50 (SSI # 32h)
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is
optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable
verification of the second check digit.

See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 12-62 for the selection of second digit algorithms.

*One MSI Check Digit

(0)

Two MSI Check Digits

(1)
12 - 62 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)

Parameter # 46 (SSI # 2Eh)
Scan a bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.

Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)

*Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)

MSI Check Digit Algorithm

Parameter # 51 (SSI # 33h)
Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below
corresponding to the algorithm used to encode the check digit.

MOD 11/MOD 10
(0)

*MOD 10/MOD 10
(1)
 Symbologies 12 - 63

Chinese 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5
Parameter # 408 (SSI # F0h 98h)
To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Chinese 2 of 5
(1)

*Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(0)

Matrix 2 of 5
Enable/Disable Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # 618 (SSI # F1h 6Ah)
To enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Matrix 2 of 5
(1)

*Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(0)
12 - 64 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5

Parameter # L1 = 619 (SSI # F1h 6Bh), L2 = 620 (SSI # F1h 6Ch)
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check
digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths
within a specific range.

• One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected
length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example,
to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then
scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of
two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes.
For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Matrix 2
of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the
selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Matrix 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length
range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example,
to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Matrix 2 of 5 -
Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (enter a leading zero for single digit numbers). To
correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-3.
• Any Length - Scan this option to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters
within the imager’s capability.

*Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length

Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths

Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range

Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length

 Symbologies 12 - 65

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 622 (SSI # F1h 6Eh)
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate
bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit.

Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)

*Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 623 (SSI # F1h 6Fh)
Scan a bar code below to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)

*Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)
12 - 66 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Korean 3 of 5
Enable/Disable Korean 3 of 5
Parameter # 581 (SSI # F1h 45h)
To enable or disable Korean 3 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below.

NOTE The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.

Enable Korean 3 of 5
(1)

*Disable Korean 3 of 5
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 67

Inverse 1D
Parameter # 586 (SSI # F1h 4Ah)
This parameter sets the 1D inverse imager setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the imager decodes regular 1D bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - the imager decodes inverse 1D bar codes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - the imager decodes both regular and inverse 1D bar codes.

*Regular
(0)

Inverse Only
(1)

Inverse Autodetect
(2)
(Default for DS457-DP Only)
12 - 68 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Postal Codes
US Postnet
Parameter # 89 (SSI # 59h)
To enable or disable US Postnet, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable US Postnet
(1)

*Disable US Postnet
(0)

US Planet
Parameter # 90 (SSI # 5Ah)
To enable or disable US Planet, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable US Planet
(1)

*Disable US Planet
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 69

Transmit US Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 95 (SSI # 5Fh)
Select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet and US Planet, with or without the
check digit.

*Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(1)

Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(0)

UK Postal
Parameter # 91 (SSI # 5Bh)
To enable or disable UK Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable UK Postal
(1)

*Disable UK Postal
(0)
12 - 70 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 96 (SSI # 60h)
Select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.

*Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit
(1)

Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

(0)

Japan Postal
Parameter # 290 (SSI # F0h, 22h)
To enable or disable Japan Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Japan Postal

(1)

*Disable Japan Postal

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 71

Australia Post
Parameter # 291 (SSI # F0h, 23h)
To enable or disable Australia Post, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Australia Post

(1)

*Disable Australia Post

(0)
12 - 72 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Australia Post Format

Parameter # 718 (SSI # F1h, CEh)
To select one of the following formats for Australia Post, scan the appropriate bar code below:

• Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Attempt to decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C
Encoding Tables.

NOTE This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the
Encoding Table used for encoding.

• Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3.

• Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table.
• Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.
For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding
Technical Specifications available at http://www.auspost.com.au.

*Autodiscriminate
(0)

Raw Format
(1)

Alphanumeric Encoding
(2)

Numeric Encoding
(3)
 Symbologies 12 - 73

Netherlands KIX Code

Parameter # 326 (SSI # F0h, 46h)
To enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Netherlands KIX Code

(1)

*Disable Netherlands KIX Code

(0)
12 - 74 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

Parameter # 592 (SSI # F1h 50h)
To enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(1)

*Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(0)

UPU FICS Postal

Parameter # 611 (SSI # F1h 63h)
To enable or disable UPU FICS Postal, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable UPU FICS Postal

(1)

*Disable UPU FICS Postal

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 75

GS1 DataBar (formerly RSS, Reduced Space Symbology)

GS1 DataBar types are:

• GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

• GS1 DataBar Truncated
• GS1 DataBar Stacked
• GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
• GS1 DataBar Limited
• GS1 DataBar Expanded
• GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
Scan the appropriate bar codes to enable or disable each type of GS1 DataBar.

GS1 DataBar
Parameter # 338 (SSI # F0h 52h)
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable the following code types:

• GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

• GS1 DataBar Truncated
• GS1 DataBar Stacked
• GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional

*Enable GS1 DataBar

(1)

Disable GS1 DataBar

(0)
12 - 76 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

GS1 DataBar Limited

Parameter # 339 (SSI # F0h 53h)

*Enable GS1 DataBar Limited

(1)

Disable GS1 DataBar Limited

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 77

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level

Parameter # 728 (SSI # F1h D8h)
The imager offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited bar codes. There is an inverse
relationship between security and decoder aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce
aggressiveness in scanning, so only choose the level of security necessary.

• Level 1 – No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet might result in
erroneous decoding of the DataBar Limited bar code when scanning some UPC symbols that start with
the digits “9” and “7”.
• Level 2 – Automatic risk detection. This level of security may result in erroneous decoding of DataBar
Limited bar codes when scanning some UPC symbols. If a misdecode is detected, the decoder operates
in Level 3 or Level 1.
• Level 3 – Security level reflects newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a 5X trailing clear margin.
• Level 4 – Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of security requires a
5X leading and trailing clear margin.

Security Level 1
(1)

Security Level 2
(2)

*Security Level 3
(3)

Security Level 4
(4)
12 - 78 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

GS1 DataBar Expanded

Parameter # 340 (SSI # F0h 54h)
Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable the following code types:

• GS1 DataBar Expanded

• GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked

*Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(1)

Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(0)

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

Parameter # 397 (SSI # F0h, 8Dh)
This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded
as part of a Composite symbol. Enable this to strip the leading '010' from GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and
GS1 DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13.

For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and
reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and
country code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be
stripped.

Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

(1)

*Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 79

Composite
Composite CC-C
Parameter # 341 (SSI # F0h 55h)
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-C.

Enable CC-C
(1)

*Disable CC-C
(0)

Composite CC-A/B
Parameter # 342 (SSI # F0h 56h)
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type CC-A/B.

Enable CC-A/B
(1)

*Disable CC-A/B
(0)
12 - 80 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Composite TLC-39
Parameter # 371 (SSI # F0h 73h)
Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Composite bar codes of type TLC-39.

Enable TLC39
(1)

*Disable TLC39
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 81

UPC Composite Mode

Parameter # 344 (SSI # F0h 58h)
UPC symbols can be “linked” with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol. There are
three options for these symbols:

• Select UPC Never Linked to transmit UPC bar codes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.
• Select UPC Always Linked to transmit UPC bar codes and the 2D portion.
If 2D is not present, the UPC bar code does not transmit.
• If Autodiscriminate UPC Composites is selected, the DS457 determines if there is a 2D portion, then
transmits the UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.

*UPC Never Linked

(0)

UPC Always Linked

(1)

Autodiscriminate UPC Composites

(2)
12 - 82 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Composite Beep Mode

Parameter # 398 (SSI # F0h, 8Eh)
To select the number of decode beeps when a composite bar code is decoded, scan the appropriate bar code.

Single Beep after both are decoded

(0)

*Beep as each code type is decoded

(1)

Double Beep after both are decoded

(2)

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes

Parameter # 427 (SSI # F0h, ABh)
Select whether to enable or disable this mode.

Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(1)

*Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 83

2D Symbologies
Enable/Disable PDF417
Parameter # 15 (SSI # 0Fh)
To enable or disable PDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable PDF417
(1)

Disable PDF417
(0)

Enable/Disable MicroPDF417
Parameter # 227 (SSI # E3h)
To enable or disable MicroPDF417, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable MicroPDF417
(1)

*Disable MicroPDF417
(0)
12 - 84 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Code 128 Emulation

Parameter # 123 (SSI # 7Bh)
When this parameter is enabled, the imager transmits data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as if it was
encoded in Code 128 symbols. Transmit AIM Symbology Identifiers must be enabled for this parameter to
work.

If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, these MicroPDF417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following
prefixes:

]C1 if the first codeword is 903-905

]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

If disabled, they are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:

]L3 if the first codeword is 903-905

]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911

Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.

NOTE Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites
instead.

Enable Code 128 Emulation

(1)

*Disable Code 128 Emulation

(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 85

Data Matrix
Parameter # 292 (SSI # F0h, 24h)
To enable or disable Data Matrix, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable Data Matrix

(1)

Disable Data Matrix

(0)
12 - 86 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Data Matrix Inverse

Parameter # 588 (SSI # F1h 4Ch)
This parameter sets the Data Matrix inverse imager setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the imager decodes regular Data Matrix bar codes only.
• Inverse Only - the imager decodes inverse Data Matrix bar codes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - the imager decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix bar codes.

*Regular
(0)

Inverse Only
(1)

Inverse Autodetect
(2)
(Default for DS457-DP Only)
 Symbologies 12 - 87

Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix Only)

Parameter # 537 (SSI # F1h 19h)
Select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix bar codes:

• Always - decode only Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images
• Never - do not decode Data Matrix bar codes that are mirror images
• Auto - decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix bar codes.

Never
(0)

Always
(1)

*Auto
(2)
12 - 88 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Maxicode
Parameter # 294 (SSI # F0h, 26h)
To enable or disable Maxicode, scan the appropriate bar code below.

Enable Maxicode
(1)

*Disable Maxicode
(0)

QR Code
Parameter # 293 (SSI # F0h, 25h)
To enable or disable QR Code, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable QR Code
(1)

Disable QR Code
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 89

QR Inverse
Parameter # 587 (SSI # F1h 4Bh)
This parameter sets the QR inverse imager setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the imager decodes regular QR bar codes only.

• Inverse Only - the imager decodes inverse QR bar codes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - the imager decodes both regular and inverse QR bar codes.

*Regular
(0)

Inverse Only
(1)

Inverse Autodetect
(2)
12 - 90 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

MicroQR
Parameter # 573 (SSI # F1h 3Dh)
To enable or disable MicroQR, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable MicroQR
(1)

Disable MicroQR
(0)

Aztec
Parameter # 574 (SSI # F1h 3Eh)
To enable or disable Aztec, scan the appropriate bar code below.

*Enable Aztec
(1)

Disable Aztec
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 91

Aztec Inverse
Parameter # 589 (SSI # F1h 4Dh)
This parameter sets the Aztec inverse imager setting. Options are:

• Regular Only - the imager decodes regular Aztec bar codes only.
• Inverse Only - the imager decodes inverse Aztec bar codes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - the imager decodes both regular and inverse Aztec bar codes.

Regular
(0)

Inverse Only
(1)

*Inverse Autodetect
(2)
12 - 92 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Redundancy Level
Parameter # 78 (SSI # 4Eh)
The imager offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of
bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the imager’s aggressiveness decreases.

Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality.

Redundancy Level 1
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:

Code Type Code Length

Codabar 8 characters or less

MSI 4 characters or less

D 2 of 5 8 characters or less

I 2 of 5 8 characters or less

Redundancy Level 2
The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:

Code Type Code Length

All All

Redundancy Level 3
Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following
codes must be read three times:

Code Type Code Length

MSI Plessey 4 characters or less

D 2 of 5 8 characters or less

I 2 of 5 8 characters or less

Codabar 8 characters or less

Redundancy Level 4
The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded:

Code Type Code Length

All All
 Symbologies 12 - 93

Redundancy Level (continued)

*Redundancy Level 1
(1)

Redundancy Level 2
(2)

Redundancy Level 3
(3)

Redundancy Level 4
(4)
12 - 94 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Security Level
Parameter # 77 (SSI # 4Dh)
The imager offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family,
UPC/EAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is
an inverse relationship between security and imager aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security
necessary for any given application.

• Security Level 0: This setting allows the imager to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing
sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes.
• Security Level 1: Select this option if misdecodes occur. This default setting should eliminate most
misdecodes.
• Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Security Level 3: If Security Level 2 was selected and misdecodes still occur, select this security level.
Be advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar
codes. Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the imager. If this level
of security is necessary, try to improve the quality of the bar codes.

Security Level 0
(0)

*Security Level 1
(1)

Security Level 2
(2)

Security Level 3
(3)
 Symbologies 12 - 95

Intercharacter Gap Size

Parameter # 381 (SSI # F0h, 7Dh)
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various
bar code-printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the
imager from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to
tolerate these out-of-specification bar codes.

*Normal Intercharacter Gaps

(6)

Large Intercharacter Gaps

(10)
12 - 96 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Macro PDF Features

Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The imager can decode
symbols that are encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 kb of decoded data stored in up to 50
Macro PDF symbols.

CAUTION When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers.
Do not mix bar codes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When
scanning Macro PDF sequences, scan the entire Macro PDF sequence without interruption.

Macro PDF User Indications

In this mode the imager provides the following feedback.

Table 12-2 Macro PDF User Indications

Passthrough All Transmit Any Buffer All

Symbols Symbol in Set Symbols
User Scans
Beep T Beep T Beep T

Last Macro PDF in set Decode Beep Y Decode Beep Y Decode Beep Y

Any Macro PDF in set except last Decode Beep Y Decode Beep Y 2 Short Low N

Macro PDF is not in current set Decode Beep Y 2 Long Low N 2 Long Low N

Invalid formatted Macro PDF Decode Beep Y 2 Long Low N 2 Long Low N

Macro PDF from a set has already been Decode Beep Y 4 Long Low N 4 Long Low N
scanned

Out of Macro PDF memory N/A - 3 Long Low N 3 Long Low N

Any non-Macro PDF scanned during a set N/A - 4 Long Low N 4 Long Low N

Flush Macro PDF Low Hi N 5 Long Low N 5 Long Low Y

Abort Macro PDF High Low N High Low N High Low N

High Low High Low High Low

Notes:
1. The beep only sounds if the *BEEPER_ON signal is connected.
2. The column marked T indicates whether the symbol is transmitted to the host.
N = No transmission.
 Symbologies 12 - 97

Macro PDF Transmit / Decode Mode Symbols

Parameter # 188 (SSI # BCh)
Select one of the options below for handling Macro PDF decoding. In Buffer All Symbols the imager can handle
sets of up to 50 maximum-sized Macro PDF symbols. In all other modes there is no limit to the size of the
Macro PDF set.

• Buffer All Symbols / Transmit Macro PDF When Complete: This transmits all decode data from an
entire Macro PDF sequence only when the entire sequence is scanned and decoded. Use the beeper
and LED signals provided with the DS457 when using this mode to ensure proper user feedback.
If the decode data exceeds the limit of 50 symbols, there is no transmission because the entire sequence
was not scanned. Use the parameter Flush Macro Buffer on page 12-99 to purge the buffer.
• Transmit Any Symbol in Set / No Particular Order: This transmits data from each Macro PDF symbol
as decoded, regardless of the sequence (although some error handling is performed; see Table 12-2).
When selecting this mode, enable Transmit Macro PDF Control Header on page 12-98. Also use the
beeper and LED signals provided with the DS457 to ensure proper user feedback.
• Passthrough All Symbols: This transmits and decodes all Macro PDF symbols and performs no
processing. In this mode the host is responsible for detecting and parsing the Macro PDF sequences.

Use this mode when the imager’s BEEPER_ON signal is not used to drive a beeper (see Table 3-1 on
page 3-4). In the other modes, some Macro PDF scanning sequences provide audible feedback only, so
if BEEPER_ON is not used no user feedback is provided. In Table 12-2, all actions marked No
Tranmission provide no feedback unless the BEEPER_ON signal is used. By using Passthrough All
Symbols mode every user decode is transmitted to the host where the host software can provide the
appropriate feedback.

Buffer All Symbols / Transmit Macro PDF When

Complete
(0)

Transmit Any Symbol in Set / No Particular Order

(1)

*Passthrough All Symbols

(4)
12 - 98 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Transmit Macro PDF Control Header

Parameter # 184 (SSI # B8h)
When enabled, this activates transmission of the control header, which contains the segment index and the file
ID, in Macro PDF symbols. For example, the field may be: \92800000\725\120\343. The five digits after the
\928 are the segment index (or block index), and \725\120\343 is the file ID.

Enable this when selecting Transmit Any Symbol in Set / No Particular Order for the Macro PDF Transmit /
Decode Mode Symbols on page 12-97, and disable this when selecting Buffer All Symbols / Transmit Macro
PDF When Complete. This parameter has no effect when Passthrough All Symbols is selected.

Enable Macro PDF Control Header Transmit

(1)

*Disable Macro PDF Control Header Transmit

(0)

Escape Characters
Parameter # 233 (SSI # E9h)
This enables the backslash (\) character as an Escape character for systems that can process transmissions
containing special data sequences. Scan a bar code below to either format special data according to the GLI
(Global Label Identifier) protocol, or to disable this parameter. This parameter only affects the data portion of a
Macro PDF symbol transmission; the Macro PDF Control Header (if enabled) is always sent with GLI
formatting.

GLI Protocol
(2)

*None
(0)
 Symbologies 12 - 99

Flush Macro Buffer

This flushes the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmits it to the host device, and
aborts from Macro PDF mode.

Flush Macro PDF Buffer

Abort Macro PDF Entry

This clears all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and aborts from Macro PDF
mode.

Abort Macro PDF Entry

12 - 100DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
CHAPTER 13 DRIVER’S LICENSE SET UP
(DS457-DL)

Introduction
The DS457-DL imager is capable of parsing out information from standard US driver's licenses and certain
other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards. This is achieved
using internally embedded algorithms, where scanning bar codes activates algorithms internally embedded in
the imager to produce formatted data. Use the formatted data for age verification, credit card application
information, and more.

This chapter describes how to program the DS6708-DL imager to read and use the data contained in the 2D
bar codes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.

Driver’s License Parsing

To enable driver's license parsing on the imager, scan the Embedded Driver's License Parsing bar code. The
default No Driver's License Parsing disables this feature.

*No Driver’s License Parsing

Embedded Driver’s License Parsing

Scan the bar codes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the imager
outputs. See Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) for more information.
13 - 2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing)

To begin programming a parsing rule:

1. Scan Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 13-3.

2. Scan any of the field bar codes on the following pages, or Send Keystroke (Control Characters and
Keyboard Characters) on page 13-23 to complete the parsing rule.

3. After entering the entire rule, scan Save Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 13-3 to save the rule.

NOTE Only ONE driver’s license parsing rule may be stored in memory at any time. Saving a new rule replaces
the prior rule.

To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming, scan Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule
on page 13-3. Any previously saved rule is retained.

To erase a programmed saved rule, scan Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules on page 13-3.

Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type

After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver's license, you can also apply standard ADF rules
to the parsed data using the Parsed Driver’s License criterion bar code in the Advanced Data Formatting
Programmer Guide.

NOTE Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver's license data when configured for Embedded Driver's
License Parsing.

See Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example on page 13-20 for a sample ADF rule using this code
type criterion.
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 3

Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes

Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule

Save Driver’s License Parse Rule

Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule

Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules

 13 - 4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

The parse fields currently supported begin below. Not all IDs present data in the same format. For example, some IDs may
have separate fields for first name, last name, and middle initial, and others may have a single field with the entire name.
In addition, some IDs may expire on the subject's birth date and the actual expiration date field may only indicate the year.
In order to present data in a consistent format, the following nine bar codes return data that may be calculated from the
actual data contained within the ID bar code.

First Name

Middle Name/Initial

Last Name

Name Suffix

Name Prefix

Expiration Date

Birth Date
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 5

Driver’s License Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Issue Date

ID Number (Formatted)
13 - 6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes

AAMVA Issuer ID

Full Name

Last Name

First Name

Middle Name / Initial

Name Suffix

Name Prefix
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 7

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Mailing Address Line 1

Mailing Address Line 2

Mailing Address City

Mailing Address State

Mailing Address Postal Code

Home Address Line 1

Home Address Line 2

13 - 8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Home Address City

Home Address State

Home Address Postal Code

License ID Number

License Class

License Restrictions

License Endorsements
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 9

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Height (Feet and/or Inches)

Height (Centimeters)

Weight (Pounds)

Weight (Kilograms)

Eye Color

Hair Color

License Expiration Date

13 - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Birth Date

Gender

License Issue Date

Social Security Number

Permit Class

Permit Expiration Date

Permit ID Number
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 11

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Permit Issue Date

Permit Restrictions

Permit Endorsements

AKA Social Security Name

AKA Full Name

AKA Last Name

AKA First Name

13 - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

AKA Middle Name / Initial

AKA Name Suffix

AKA Name Prefix

AKA Birth Date

Issue Timestamp

Number of Duplicates

Medical Codes
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 13

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Organ Donor

Nonresident

Customer ID

Weight Range

Document Discriminator

Country

Federal Commission Codes

13 - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Place of Birth

Audit Information

Inventory Control

Race / Ethnicity

Std Vehicle Class

Std Endorsements

Std Restrictions
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 15

AAMVA Parse Field Bar Codes (continued)

Class Description

Endorsement Description

Restrictions Description

Height in Inches

Height in Centimeters

Parser Version ID Bar Codes

Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification

Parser Version ID
13 - 16 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Parsing Rule Example

Scan the following bar codes in sequence to program the imager to extract and transmit first, middle, and last
names; mailing address line 1; mailing address line 2; mailing address city; mailing address state; mailing
address postal code; and, date of birth. Then, scan a driver’s license bar code.

NOTE This example applies to RS-232. To use this example with a USB interface, scan Function Key Mapping
on page 10-11 in place of the Send Control M (Carriage Return) bar codes.

Embedded Driver’s License Parsing

Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule

First Name

Send Space

Middle Name / Initial

Send Space
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 17

Parsing Rule Example (continued)

7

Last Name

Send Enter Key

Mailing Address Line 1

10

Send Space

11

Mailing Address Line 2

q
12

Send Enter Key

13 - 18 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Parsing Rule Example (continued)

13

Mailing Address City

14

Send Space

15

Mailing Address State

16

Send Space

17

Mailing Address Postal Code

 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 19

Parsing Rule Example (continued)

18

Send Enter Key

19

Birth Date

20

Send Enter Key

21

Save Driver’s Licence Parse Rule

13 - 20 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example

This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format:
Last Name, First Name

Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule

Last Name

Send ,

Send Space

First Name

Save Driver’s Licence Parse Rule

 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 21

Then, in order to limit the full name to 15 characters, create the following ADF rule:

Begin New Rule

Criterion: Parsed Driver's License

Action: Send Next 15 Characters

Save Rule

For a license belonging to Michael Williams, the parsed data is Williams, Michael and Williams, Micha after
applying the previous ADF rule.
13 - 22 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Field Update Procedure

Scan the following bar codes in order to perform a field update.

This update COMPLETELY REPLACES prior updates and overrides any embedded parsing software
programmed in the imager.

1. Scan Field Update Start.

Field Update Start

2. Scan the entire set of PDF bar codes provided separately.

3. Scan Field Update End.

Field Update End

Scan Erase all Field Updates to completely remove all previous updates. It is not necessary to scan this bar
code before performing a normal field update. Scanning this bar code ensures that only the parsing software
currently in the imager is used for parsing.

Erase all Field Updates

 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 23

User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this bar code to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table A-1 on page A-1.

*Set All Defaults

Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)

Control Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keystroke to send.

Send Control A

Send Control B
13 - 24 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control C

Send Control D

Send Control E

Send Control F

Send Control G

Send Control H

Send Control I
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 25

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control J

Send Control K

Send Control L

Send Control M

Send Control N

Send Control O

Send Control P
13 - 26 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control Q

Send Control R

Send Control S

Send Control T

Send Control U

Send Control V

Send Control W
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 27

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control X

Send Control Y

Send Control Z

Send Control [

Send Control \

Send Control ]
13 - 28 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Control Characters (continued)

Send Control 6

Send Control -

Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send bar code for the keyboard characters to send.

Send Space

Send !

Send “

Send #
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 29

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send $

Send %

Send &

Send ‘

Send (

Send )

Send *
13 - 30 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send +

Send ,

Send -

Send .

Send /

Send 0

Send 1
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 31

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send 2

Send 3

Send 4

Send 5

Send 6

Send 7

Send 8
13 - 32 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send 9

Send :

Send ;

Send <

Send =

Send >

Send ?
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 33

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send @

Send A

Send B

Send C

Send D

Send E

Send F
13 - 34 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send G

Send H

Send I

Send J

Send K

Send L

Send M
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 35

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send N

Send O

Send P

Send Q

Send R

Send S

Send T
13 - 36 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send U

Send V

Send W

Send X

Send Y

Send Z

Send [
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 37

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send \

Send ]

Send ^

Send _

Send `

Send a

Send b
13 - 38 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send c

Send d

Send e

Send f

Send g

Send h

Send i
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 39

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send j

Send k

Send l

Send m

Send n

Send o

Send p
13 - 40 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send q

Send r

Send s

Send t

Send u

Send v

Send w
 Driver’s License Set Up (DS457-DL) 13 - 41

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send x

Send y

Send z

Send {

Send |

Send }

Send ~
13 - 42 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Keyboard Characters (continued)

Send Tab Key

Send Enter Key

CHAPTER 14 123SCAN

Introduction
123Scan is an easy to use, PC-based software tool that enables rapid customized setup of Zebra imagers.

123Scan uses a wizard tool to guide users through a streamlined set up process. Settings are saved in a
configuration file that can be distributed via e-mail, electronically downloaded via a USB cable, or used to
generate a sheet of scannable programming bar codes.

Additionally 123Scan can upgrade imager firmware, check online to enable support for newly released
products, generate a collection of multi-setting bar codes if the number of settings is very large, stage a large
number of imagers simultaneously, generate reports with asset tracking information, and create custom
products.

123Scan is an easy-to-use, PC-based software tool that enables the quick and easy setup of Zebra imagers.
123Scan uses a wizard tool to guide users through a streamlined set up process. Once parameters are set, the
values are saved to a configuration file that can be distributed via e-mail, or used to generate a sheet of
programming bar codes that can be scanned.

Communication with 123Scan

To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows XP SP2 or
Windows 7 operating system, use a USB cable to connect the imager to the host computer (see USB Host
Connection on page 2-8).
14 - 2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

123Scan Requirements
• Host computer with Windows XP SP2 or Windows 7
• Imager
• USB cable.
For more information on123Scan, go to: http://www.zebra.com/123Scan

For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan, go to: http://www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos

To see a list of all of our software tools, go to: http://www.zebra.com/scannersoftware

Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos

Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools. Whether you need to
simply stage a device, or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset
management, these tools help you every step of the way. To download any of the free tools listed below, go to:
http://www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.

• 123Scan configuration utility (described in this chapter)

• Scanner SDK for Windows
• How-to videos
• Virtual COM port driver
• OPOS driver
• JPOS driver
• Scanner user documentation
• Archive of older drivers.
CHAPTER 15 ADVANCED DATA
FORMATTING

Introduction
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use
ADF to edit scan data to suit requirements. Implement ADF by scanning a related series of bar codes which
program the imager with ADF rules.

For information and programming bar codes for ADF, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer
Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx.
15 - 2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
APPENDIX A STANDARD DEFAULT
PARAMETERS
Default Parameters

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table

Parameter Parameter SSI Number Default Page

Number Number

User Preferences

Set Default Parameter N/A N/A Restore Defaults 6-5

Parameter Scanning 236 ECh Enable 6-6

User Parameter Pass Through 625 F1h 71h Disable 6-7

Beep After Good Decode 56 38h Enable 6-8

Beeper Tone 145 91h Medium 6-9

Beeper Volume 140 8Ch High 6-10

Suppress Power-up Beeps 721 F1h D1h Do not suppress 6-10

Trigger Modes 138 8Ah Presentation 6-11

Presentation Performance Mode 650 F1h 8Ah Standard 6-12

Time Delay to Presentation Idle Mode 663 F1h 97h 1 Minute 6-13

Time Delay to Presentation Sleep Mode 662 F1h 96h 1 Minute 6-15

Power Mode 128 80h Low Power 6-17

Time Delay to Low Power Mode 146 92h 1.0 Sec 6-17

Picklist Mode 402 F0h 92h Disabled Always 6-19

Decode Session Timeout 136 88h 9.9 Sec 6-19

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Timeout Between Decodes, 137 89h 0.6 Sec 6-20

Same Symbol

Continuous Bar Code Read 649 F1 89h Disable 6-20

Unique Bar Code Reporting 723 F1h D3h Enable 6-21

Mirrored Image 624 F1h 70h Disable 6-21

Mobile Phone/Display Mode 716 F1h CCh Disable 6-22

Validate Concatenated Parameter Bar 692 F1h B4h Disable 6-22

Codes

PDF Prioritization 719 F1h CFh Disable 6-23

PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 F1h D0h 400 ms 6-23

Multicode Mode 677 F1h A5h Disable 6-24

Multicode Expression 661 F1h 95h 1 6-25

Multicode Mode Concatenation 717 F1h, CDh Disable 6-33

Multicode Concatenation Symbology 722 F1h, D2h Concatenate as 6-34

PDF417

Miscellaneous Parameters

Transmit Code ID Character 45 2Dh None 6-37

SSI Prefix Value 105 69h <CR> 6-38

SSI Suffix 1 Value 104 68h <CR> 6-38

SSI Suffix 2 Value 106 6Ah <CR>

Non-SSI Prefix Value 99, 105 63h, 69h <CR><LF> 6-38

Non-SSI Suffix 1 Value 98, 104 62h, 68h <CR><LF> 6-38

Non-SSI Suffix 2 Value 100, 106 64h, 6Ah <CR><LF>

Scan Data Transmission Format 235 EBh Data as is 6-39

FN1 Substitution Values 103, 109 67h, 6Dh Set 6-40

Transmit “No Read” Message 94 5Eh Disable 6-41

Report Version 6-41

1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
 Standard Default Parameters A-3

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Imager Preferences

Decoding Autoexposure 297 F0h 29h Enable 7-5

Decoding Illumination 298 F0h 2Ah Enable 7-6

Decode Aiming Pattern 306 F0h 32h Enable 7-6

Aim Brightness 668 F1h 9Ch 0 7-7

Illumination Brightness 669 F1h 9Dh 10 7-7

Low Light Enhancement 612 F1h 64h Disable 7-8

Power Up Light in Presentation Mode 1198 F8h 04h AEh Disable 7-8

Presentation Mode Field of View 609 F1h 61h Default (Reduced) 7-9

Frame Rate 674 F1h A2h Auto 7-10

Image Capture Autoexposure 360 F0h 68h Enable 7-12

Image Capture Illumination 361 F0h 69h Enable 7-12

Fixed Gain 568 F1h 38h 50 7-13

Exposure Time 567 F4h F1h 37h 100 (10 ms) 7-13

Snapshot Mode Timeout 323 F0h 43h 0 (30 seconds) 7-14

Snapshot Aiming Pattern 300 F0h 2Ch Enable 7-14

Presentation Snapshot by Motion 647 F1h 87h Disable 7-15

Continuous Snapshot 648 F1h 88h Disable 7-15

Image Cropping 301 F0h 2Dh Disable 7-16

Crop to Pixel Addresses 315, 316, F4h F0h 3Bh; 0 top, 0 left, 479 7-17
317, 318 F4h F0h 3Ch; bottom,
F4h F0h 3Dh; 751 right
F4h F0h 3Eh

Image Resolution 302 F0h 2Eh Full 7-18

Image Brightness (Target White) 390 F0h 86h 180 7-19

Image File Format Selection 304 F0h 30h JPEG 7-20

JPEG Image Options 299 F0h 2Bh Quality 7-20

JPEG Quality Value 305 F0h 31h 65 7-21

JPEG Size Value 561 F1h 31h 160 (164K) 7-21

Image File Meta Data 693 F1h B5h Disable 7-22

Image Enhancement 564 F1h 34h Off 7-23

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Image Edge Sharpening 664 F1h 98h Low 7-24

Image Contrast Enhancement 666 F1h 9Ah Off 7-25

Image Rotation 665 F1h 99h 0 7-26

Bits per Pixel (BPP) 303 F0h 2Fh 8 BPP 7-27

Signature Capture 93 5Dh Disable 7-28

Signature Capture Image File Format 313 F0h 39h JPEG 7-29
Selection

Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP) 314 F0h 3Ah 8 BPP 7-30

Signature Capture Width 366 F4h F0h 6Eh 400 7-30

Signature Capture Height 367 F4h F0h 6Fh 100 7-31

Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 F0h A5h 65 7-31

Video Mode Format Selector 916 F2h 94h JPEG 7-32

Video View Finder 324 F0h 44h Disable 7-32

Target Video Frame Size 328 F0h 48h 2200 bytes 7-33

Video View Finder Image Size 329 F0h 49h 1700 bytes 7-33

Video Resolution 667 F1h 9Bh 1/4 resolution 7-34

SSI Host Parameters

Select SSI Host N/A N/A N/A 8-9

Baud Rate 156 9Ch 9600 8-10

Parity 258 9Eh None 8-11

Check Parity 151 97h Disable 8-12

Software Handshaking 159 9Fh ACK/NAK 8-12

Host RTS Line State 154 9Ah Low 8-13

Decode Data Packet Format 238 EEh Send Raw Decode 8-13
Data

Host Serial Response Time-out 155 9Bh 2 sec 8-14

Host Character Time-out 239 EFh 200 msec 8-15

Multipacket Option 334 F0h 4Eh Option 1 8-16

Interpacket Delay 335 F0h 4Fh 0 ms 8-17

1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
 Standard Default Parameters A-5

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Event Reporting

Decode Event 256 F0h 00h Disable 8-18

Boot Up Event 258 F0h 02h Disable 8-19

Parameter Event 259 F0h 03h Disable 8-19

Serial Host Parameters

Serial Host Types N/A N/A Standard RS-232 9-5

Baud Rate N/A N/A 9600 9-7

Parity Type N/A N/A None 9-9

Data Bits N/A N/A 8-Bit 9-9

Check Receive Errors N/A N/A Enable 9-10

Hardware Handshaking N/A N/A None 9-11

Software Handshaking N/A N/A None 9-13

Host Serial Response Time-out N/A N/A 2 Sec 9-15

RTS Line State N/A N/A Low RTS 9-16

Beep on <BEL> N/A N/A Disable 9-16

Intercharacter Delay N/A N/A 0 msec 9-17

Nixdorf Beep/LED Options N/A N/A Normal Operation 9-18

Ignore Unknown Characters N/A N/A Send Bar Code 9-18

USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type N/A N/A USB HID Keyboard 10-3

Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status N/A N/A Enable 10-5

Handshaking

USB Country Keyboard Types (Country N/A N/A North American 10-6
Codes)

USB Keystroke Delay N/A N/A No Delay 10-8

USB CAPS Lock Override N/A N/A Disable 10-8

USB Ignore Unknown Characters N/A N/A Enable 10-9

Emulate Keypad N/A N/A Disable 10-9

Emulate Keypad with Leading Zero N/A N/A Disable 10-10

Quick Keypad Emulation N/A N/A Disable 10-10

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

USB FN1 Substitution N/A N/A Disable 10-11

Function Key Mapping N/A N/A Disable 10-11

Simulated Caps Lock N/A N/A Disable 10-12

Convert Case N/A N/A None 10-13

USB Static CDC N/A N/A Enable 10-13

USB Ignore Beep Directive N/A N/A Honor 10-14

USB Ignore Type Directive N/A N/A Honor 10-14

USB Polling Interval N/A N/A 3 msec 10-15

Fast HID Keyboard N/A N/A Enable 10-17

IBM Specification Level N/A N/A Version 0 (Original) 10-17

OCR Programming Parameters

OCR-A 680 F1h A8h Disable 11-3

OCR-A Variant 684 F1h ACh Full ASCII 11-3

OCR-B 681 F1h A9h Disable 11-5

OCR-B Variant 685 F1h ADh Full ASCII 11-6

MICR E13B 682 F1h AAh Disable 11-9

US Currency 683 F1h ABh Disable 11-10

OCR Orientation 687 F1h AFh 0o 11-10

OCR Lines 691 F1h B3h 1 11-12

OCR Min Char 689 F1h B1h 3 11-13

OCR Max Char 690 F1h B2h 100 11-13

OCR Security Level 554 F1h 2Ah 80 11-13

OCR Subset 686 F1h AEh Selected font variant 11-14

OCR Quiet Zone 695 F1h B7h 50 11-14

OCR Bright Illumination 701 F1h BDh Disable 11-15

OCR Template 547 F1h 23h 54R 11-16

OCR Check Digit Modulus 688 F1h B0h 1 11-25

OCR Check Digit Multiplier 700 F1h BCh 121212121212 11-26

OCR Check Digit Validation 694 F1h B6h None 11-27

1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
 Standard Default Parameters A-7

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Inverse OCR 856 F2h 58h None 11-31

Disable All Symbologies N/A N/A N/A 12-8

UPC/EAN

UPC-A 1 01h Enable 12-9

UPC-E 2 02h Enable 12-9

UPC-E1 12 0Ch Disable 12-10

EAN-8/JAN 8 4 04h Enable 12-10

EAN-13/JAN 13 3 03h Enable 12-11

Bookland EAN 83 53h Disable 12-11

Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals 16 10h Ignore 12-12

(2 and 5 digits)

User-Programmable Supplementals 12-15

Supplemental 1: 579 F1h 43h
Supplemental 2: 580 F1h 44h

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental 80 50h 10 12-15

Redundancy

UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID 672 F1h A0h Combined 12-16

Format

Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 40 28h Enable 12-17

Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 41 29h Enable 12-17

Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 42 2Ah Enable 12-18

UPC-A Preamble 34 22h System Character 12-19

UPC-E Preamble 35 23h System Character 12-20

UPC-E1 Preamble 36 24h System Character 12-21

Convert UPC-E to A 37 25h Disable 12-22

Convert UPC-E1 to A 38 26h Disable 12-22

EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend 39 27h Disable 12-23

Bookland ISBN Format 576 F1h 40h ISBN-10 12-24

UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 55h Disable 12-25

Coupon Report 730 F1h DAh New Coupon Format 12-26

ISSN EAN 617 F1h 69h Disable 12-27

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Code 128

Code 128 8 08h Enable 12-28

Set Length(s) for Code 128 209, 210 D1h D2h Any Length 12-28

GS1-128 (UCC/EAN-128) 14 0Eh Enable 12-30

ISBT 128 84 54h Enable 12-30

ISBT Concatenation 577 F1h 41h Disable 12-31

Check ISBT Table 578 F1h 42h Enable 12-32

ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 DFh 10 12-32

Code 128 Security Level 751 F3h EFh Security Level 1 12-33

Code 39

Code 39 0 00h Enable 12-34

Trioptic Code 39 13 0Dh Disable 12-34

Convert Code 39 to Code 32 86 56h Disable 12-35

(Italian Pharmacy Code)

Code 32 Prefix 231 E7h Disable 12-35

Set Length(s) for Code 39 18, 19 12h 13h 2 to 55 12-36

Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48 30h Disable 12-37

Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 2Bh Disable 12-38

Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 11h Disable 12-38

Buffer Code 39 113 71h Disable 12-39

Code 39 Security Level 750 F3h EEh Security Level 1 12-42

Code 93

Code 93 9 09h Disable 12-43

Set Length(s) for Code 93 26, 27 1Ah 1Bh 4 to 55 12-43

Code 11

Code 11 10 0Ah Disable 12-45

Set Lengths for Code 11 28, 29 1Ch 1Dh 4 to 55 12-45

Code 11 Check Digit Verification 52 34h Disable 12-47

Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47 2Fh Disable 12-48

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
 Standard Default Parameters A-9

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 6 06h Enable 12-48

Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 22, 23 16h 17h Range 6 - 55 12-49

I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 31h Disable 12-50

Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 2Ch Disable 12-51

Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 82 52h Disable 12-51

I 2 of 5 Security Level 1121 Security Level 1 12-52

Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)

Discrete 2 of 5 5 05h Disable 12-53

Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 20, 21 14h 15h 12 12-53

Codabar (NW - 7)

Codabar 7 07h Disable 12-55

Set Lengths for Codabar 24, 25 18h 19h 5 to 55 12-55

CLSI Editing 54 36h Disable 12-57

NOTIS Editing 55 37h Disable 12-57

Codabar Upper or Lower Case 855 F2h 57h Upper Case 12-58
Start/Stop Characters Transmission

MSI

MSI 11 0Bh Disable 12-59

Set Length(s) for MSI 30, 31 1Eh 1Fh 4 to 55 12-59

MSI Check Digits 50 32h One 12-61

Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 2Eh Disable 12-62

MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 12-62

Chinese 2 of 5

Chinese 2 of 5 408 F0h 98h Disable 12-63

Matrix 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5 618 F1h 6Ah Disable 12-63

Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 619, 620 F1h 6Bh 1 Length: 14 12-64

F1h 6Ch

Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 F1h 6Eh Disable 12-65

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 F1h 6Fh Disable 12-65

Korean 3 of 5

Korean 3 of 5 581 F1h 45h Disable 12-66

Inverse 1D 586 F1h 4Ah DS457-SR/HD/DL: 12-67

Regular
DS457-DP:
Inverse Autodetect

Postal Codes

US Postnet 89 59h Disable 12-68

US Planet 90 5Ah Disable 12-68

Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 5Fh Enable 12-69

UK Postal 91 5Bh Disable 12-69

Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 60h Enable 12-70

Japan Postal 290 F0h 22h Disable 12-70

Australia Post 291 F0h 23h Disable 12-71

Australia Post Format 718 F1h CEh Autodiscriminate 12-72

Netherlands KIX Code 326 F0h 46h Disable 12-73

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail 592 F1h 50h Disable 12-74

UPU FICS Postal 611 F1h 63h Disable 12-74

GS1 DataBar (formerly RSS, Reduced Space Symbology)

GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar 338 F0h 52h Enable 12-75

Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar
Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1
DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional)

GS1 DataBar Limited 339 F0h 53h Enable 12-76

GS1 DataBar Limited Security Level 728 F1h D8h 3 12-77

GS1 DataBar Expanded (GS1 DataBar 340 F0h 54h Enable 12-78
Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded
Stacked)

Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN 397 F0h 8Dh Disable 12-78

Composite

Composite CC-C 341 F0h 55h Disable 12-79

Composite CC-A/B 342 F0h 56h Disable 12-79

1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
 Standard Default Parameters A - 11

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Composite TLC-39 371 F0h 73h Disable 12-80

UPC Composite Mode 344 F0h 58h Never Linked 12-81

Composite Beep Mode 398 F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code 12-82
Type is Decoded

GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN 427 F0h ABh Disable 12-82
Composite Codes

2D Symbologies

PDF417 15 0Fh Enable 12-83

MicroPDF417 227 E3h Disable 12-83

Code 128 Emulation 123 7Bh Disable 12-84

Data Matrix 292 F0h 24h Enable 12-85

Data Matrix Inverse 588 F1h 4Ch DS457-SR/HD/DL: 12-86

Regular
DS457-DP:
Inverse Autodetect

Decode Mirror Images (Data Matrix 537 F1h, 19h Auto 12-87
Only)

Maxicode 294 F0h 26h Disable 12-88

QR Code 293 F0h 25h Enable 12-88

QR Inverse 587 F1h 4Bh Regular 12-89

MicroQR 573 F1h 3Dh Enable 12-90

Aztec 574 F1h 3Eh Enable 12-90

Aztec Inverse 589 F1h 4Dh Inverse Autodetect 12-91

Symbology-Specific Security Levels

Redundancy Level 78 4Eh 1 12-92

Security Level 77 4Dh 1 12-94

Intercharacter Gap Size 381 F0h 7Dh Normal 12-95

1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
A - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table A-1 Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued)

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number

Macro PDF

Macro PDF Transmit/Decode Mode 188 BCh Passthrough Mode 12-97

Symbols

Transmit Macro PDF Control Header 184 B8h Disable 12-98

Escape Characters 233 E9h None 12-98

Flush Macro PDF Buffer N/A N/A N/A 12-99

Abort Macro PDF Entry N/A N/A N/A 12-99

1
User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection.
 Standard Default Parameters A - 13

Reserved Parameters
The DS457 reports the following parameters, however these parameters are reserved for future use.

• 0x20
• 0x21
• 0x3A
• 0x3B
• 0x3C
• 0x3D
• 0x3E
• 0x3F
• 0x40
• 0x41
• 0x42
• 0x45
• 0x71
• 0xCF
• 0xD0
• 0xD1
• 0xD2
• 0xD5
• 0xEA
• 0xF0, 0x01
• 0xF0, 0x04
• 0xF0, 0x05
• 0xF0, 0x28
• 0xF0, 0x94
• 0xF0, 0x96
• 0xF0, 0x97
• 0xF0, 0x98
• 0xF0, 0x99
• 0xF0, 0xA8
• 0xF0, 0xA9
A - 14 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
APPENDIX B PROGRAMMING REFERENCE

Code Identifiers
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:

] = Flag Character (ASCII 93)

c = Code Character (see Table B-1)
m = Modifier Character (see Table B-2)

The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-2.

Table B-1 Code Characters

Code Type Symbol Code Character AIM Code Character

UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13 A E

Code 39, Code 32 B A

Codabar C F

Code 128, ISBT 128 D C

Code 93 E G

Interleaved 2 of 5 F I

Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA G S

Code 11 H H

MSI J M

GS1-128 K

Bookland EAN L X

Trioptic Code 39 M X
B-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table B-1 Code Characters (Continued)

Code Type Symbol Code Character AIM Code Character

Coupon Code N E (UPC portion)

C (Code 128 portion)

GS1 DataBar Family R e

Matrix 2 of 5 S X

UCC Composite, TLC 39 T

Chinese 2 of 5 U X

Korean 3 of 5 V X

ISSN X X

PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417 X L

Aztec, Aztec Rune z z

Data Matrix P00 d

QR Code, MicroQR P01 Q

Maxicode P02 U

US Postnet P03 X

US Planet P04 X

Japan Postal P05 X

UK Postal P06 X

Netherlands KIX Code P08 X

Australia Post P09 X

USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail P0A X

UPU FICS Postal P0B X

 Programming Reference B-3

Table B-2 AIM Code Modifier Characters

Code Type Option Value Option

Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing.

1 Reader has checked one check character.

3 Reader has checked and stripped check character.

4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.

5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked

one check character.

7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked

and stripped check character.

Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as
]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).

Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356

Code 128 0 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.

1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position.

2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.

Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position,
AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID

I 2 of 5 0 No check digit processing.

1 Reader has validated check digit.

3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit.

Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123

Codabar 0 No check digit processing.

1 Reader has checked check digit.

3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.

Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123

Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905

MSI 0 Check digits are sent.

1 No check digit is sent.

Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as
]M14123
B-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table B-2 AIM Code Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value Option

D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123

UPC/EAN 0 Standard packet in full EAN country code format, which is 13 digits for
UPC-A, UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).

1 Two-digit supplement data only.

2 Five-digit supplement data only.

3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from a UPC-A, UPC-E, or

EAN-13 symbol and 2 or 5 digits from a supplemental symbol.

4 EAN-8 data packet.

Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905

Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.

Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X

Code 11 0 Single check digit

1 Two check digits

3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.

GS1 DataBar No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar
Family Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application
Identifier “01”.
Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using
Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).

Example: A GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional bar code 100123456788902 is transmitted as

]e001100123456788902.

EAN.UCC Native mode transmission.

Composites Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
(GS1 DataBar,
GS1-128, 0 Standard data packet.
2D portion of UPC
1 Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator
composite)
character.

2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism

character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.

3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism

character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.

GS1-128 emulation
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.

1 Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]C1).

 Programming Reference B-5

Table B-2 AIM Code Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value Option

PDF417, 0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology

Micro PDF417 specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted, the receiver
cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether
data byte 92DEC has been doubled in transmission.

1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel

Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are doubled.

2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character

transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC are not doubled.
Note: When imagers are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro symbols
and symbols requiring the imager to convey ECI escape sequences
cannot be transmitted.

3 The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is
903-907, 912, 914, 915.

4 The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in
the range 908-909.

5 The bar code contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in
the range 910-911.

Example: A PDF417 bar code ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is

transmitted as ]L2ABCD.

Data Matrix 0 ECC 000-140, not supported.

1 ECC 200.

2 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.

3 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.

4 ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.

5 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.

6 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol implemented.

MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.

1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.

2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.

3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary

message.
B-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table B-2 AIM Code Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code Type Option Value Option

QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol.

1 Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.

2 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.

3 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first

position.

4 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first

position.

5 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in

second position.

6 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in second

position.

Aztec 0 Aztec symbol.

C Aztec Rune symbol.

APPENDIX C SAMPLE BAR CODES

Code 39

123ABC

UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100 %

0 12345 67890 5

EAN-13, 100 %

3 4 5 67 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 0
C-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Code 128

12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234

Interleaved 2 of 5

12345678901231

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

NOTE GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional must be enabled to read the bar code below (see GS1 DataBar on page
12-75).

7612341562341

PDF417
 Sample Bar Codes C-3

Data Matrix

Maxicode
C-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
APPENDIX D NUMERIC BAR CODES

Numeric Bar Codes

For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).

3
D-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Numeric Bar Codes (continued)

For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s).

9
 Numeric Bar Codes D-3

Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below.

Cancel
D-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
APPENDIX E ASCII CHARACTER SET

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table

Full ASCII Code 39
ASCII Value Keystroke
Encode Char

1000 %U CTRL 2

1001 $A CTRL A

1002 $B CTRL B

1003 $C CTRL C

1004 $D CTRL D

1005 $E CTRL E

1006 $F CTRL F

1007 $G CTRL G

1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1

1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1

1010 $J CTRL J

1011 $K CTRL K

1012 $L CTRL L

1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1

1014 $N CTRL N

1015 $O CTRL O

The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
E-2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

Full ASCII Code 39
ASCII Value Keystroke
Encode Char

1016 $P CTRL P

1017 $Q CTRL Q

1018 $R CTRL R

1019 $S CTRL S

1020 $T CTRL T

1021 $U CTRL U

1022 $V CTRL V

1023 $W CTRL W

1024 $X CTRL X

1025 $Y CTRL Y

1026 $Z CTRL Z

1027 %A CTRL [

1028 %B CTRL \

1029 %C CTRL ]

1030 %D CTRL 6

1031 %E CTRL -

1032 Space Space

1033 /A !

1034 /B “

1035 /C #

1036 /D $

1037 /E %

1038 /F &

1039 /G ‘

1040 /H (

1041 /I )

1042 /J *

1043 /K +

1044 /L ,

The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
 ASCII Character Set E-3

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

Full ASCII Code 39
ASCII Value Keystroke
Encode Char

1045 - -

1046 . .

1047 /o /

1048 0 0

1049 1 1

1050 2 2

1051 3 3

1052 4 4

1053 5 5

1054 6 6

1055 7 7

1056 8 8

1057 9 9

1058 /Z :

1059 %F ;

1060 %G <

1061 %H =

1062 %I >

1063 %J ?

1064 %V @

1065 A A

1066 B B

1067 C C

1068 D D

1069 E E

1070 F F

1071 G G

1072 H H

1073 I I

The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
E-4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

Full ASCII Code 39
ASCII Value Keystroke
Encode Char

1074 J J

1075 K K

1076 L L

1077 M M

1078 N N

1079 O O

1080 P P

1081 Q Q

1082 R R

1083 S S

1084 T T

1085 U U

1086 V V

1087 W W

1088 X X

1089 Y Y

1090 Z Z

1091 %K [

1092 %L \

1093 %M ]

1094 %N ^

1095 %O _

1096 %W ‘

1097 +A a

1098 +B b

1099 +C c

1100 +D d

1101 +E e

1102 +F f

The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
 ASCII Character Set E-5

Table E-1 ASCII Value Table (Continued)

Full ASCII Code 39
ASCII Value Keystroke
Encode Char

1103 +G g

1104 +H h

1105 +I i

1106 +J j

1107 +K k

1108 +L l

1109 +M m

1110 +N n

1111 +O o

1112 +P p

1113 +Q q

1114 +R r

1115 +S s

1116 +T t

1117 +U u

1118 +V v

1119 +W w

1120 +X x

1121 +Y y

1122 +Z z

1123 %P {

1124 %Q I

1125 %R }

1126 %S ~

The keystroke in bold is sent only if the Function Key Mapping is enabled.
Otherwise, the unbold keystroke is sent.
E-6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table E-2 ALT Key Standard Default Tables

ALT Keys Keystroke

2064 ALT 2

2065 ALT A

2066 ALT B

2067 ALT C

2068 ALT D

2069 ALT E

2070 ALT F

2071 ALT G

2072 ALT H

2073 ALT I

2074 ALT J

2075 ALT K

2076 ALT L

2077 ALT M

2078 ALT N

2079 ALT O

2080 ALT P

2081 ALT Q

2082 ALT R

2083 ALT S

2084 ALT T

2085 ALT U

2086 ALT V

2087 ALT W

2088 ALT X

2089 ALT Y

2090 ALT Z
 ASCII Character Set E-7

Table E-3 USB GUI Key Character Set

GUI Key Keystroke

3000 Right Control Key

3048 GUI 0

3049 GUI 1

3050 GUI 2

3051 GUI 3

3052 GUI 4

3053 GUI 5

3054 GUI 6

3055 GUI 7

3056 GUI 8

3057 GUI 9

3065 GUI A

3066 GUI B

3067 GUI C

3068 GUI D

3069 GUI E

3070 GUI F

3071 GUI G

3072 GUI H

3073 GUI I

3074 GUI J

3075 GUI K

3076 GUI L

3077 GUI M

3078 GUI N

3079 GUI O

3080 GUI P

3081 GUI Q

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either
side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the
left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
E-8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table E-3 USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued)

GUI Key Keystroke

3082 GUI R

3083 GUI S

3084 GUI T

3085 GUI U

3086 GUI V

3087 GUI W

3088 GUI X

3089 GUI Y

3090 GUI Z

Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either
side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the
left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
 ASCII Character Set E-9

Table E-4 PF Key Standard Default Table

PF Keys Keystroke

4001 PF 1

4002 PF 2

4003 PF 3

4004 PF 4

4005 PF 5

4006 PF 6

4007 PF 7

4008 PF 8

4009 PF 9

4010 PF 10

4011 PF 11

4012 PF 12

4013 PF 13

4014 PF 14

4015 PF 15

4016 PF 16
E - 10 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table E-5 F key Standard Default Table

F Keys Keystroke

5001 F1

5002 F2

5003 F3

5004 F4

5005 F5

5006 F6

5007 F7

5008 F8

5009 F9

5010 F 10

5011 F 11

5012 F 12

5013 F 13

5014 F 14

5015 F 15

5016 F 16

5017 F 17

5018 F 18

5019 F 19

5020 F 20

5021 F 21

5022 F 22

5023 F 23

5024 F 24

Table E-6 Numeric Key Standard Default Table

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6042 *

6043 +

6044 Undefined
 ASCII Character Set E - 11

Table E-6 Numeric Key Standard Default Table (Continued)

Numeric Keypad Keystroke

6045 -

6046 .

6047 /

6048 0

6049 1

6050 2

6051 3

6052 4

6053 5

6054 6

6055 7

6056 8

6057 9

6058 Enter

6059 Num Lock

E - 12 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

Table E-7 Extended Keypad Standard Default Table

Extended Keypad Keystroke

7001 Break

7002 Delete

7003 Pg Up

7004 End

7005 Pg Dn

7006 Pause

7007 Scroll Lock

7008 Backspace

7009 Tab

7010 Print Screen

7011 Insert

7012 Home

7013 Enter

7014 Escape

7015 Up Arrow

7016 Dn Arrow

7017 Left Arrow

7018 Right Arrow

INDEX

Numerics serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 assembling stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2D bar codes autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, 7-12
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90
aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-91
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-84 B
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85 bar codes
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-86 AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-72
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, 7-12
MicroQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90 aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-91
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
QR inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89 beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
A bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27, 7-30
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
adding window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 codabar start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . 12-58
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-84
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 code 128 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 code 39
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 transmit buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
LED spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 code39 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
aiming options composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79
decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79
snapshot aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-80
snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 continuous bar code read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 continuous snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 crop to address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85
aiming tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-86
ambient light immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
anti-reflection coaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
ASCII values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Index - 2 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 inverse OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31

decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
discrete 2 of 5 maximum characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54 MICR E13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
driver’s license parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 minimum chararacter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 OCR-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 OCR-A variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 OCR-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
ecode mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-87 OCR-B variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
event reporting orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
boot up event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
decode event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
parameter event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
exposure time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
field updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
fixed gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 US currency serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
flush macro buffer/abort macro PDF entry . . . 12-99 operational mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
GS1 databar limited security level . . . . . . . . . 12-77 parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
I 2 of 5 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6, 7-12 parsing ADF example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 parsing rule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
image file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20, 7-29 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83
image file meta data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 picklist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
imager power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . 12-33, 12-51, 12-52 presentation performance mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-49, 12-50 presentation snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 QR inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89
JPEG quality and size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 RS-232
low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88 serial
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
MicroQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-90 beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
mirrored image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
miscellaneous data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
transmit no read msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11, 9-12
mobile phone/display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
multicode expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
multicode expression examples . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
multicode expression via SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
multicode mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
OCR stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
bright illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 13-23
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
check digit multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26 signature capture height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
check digit validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27 signature capture JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 signature capture width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
 Index - 3

snapshot aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27

snapshot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70
snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63, 12-66
SSI matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9, 8-10 matrix 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64
check parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 matrix 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . 12-65
data packet format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59
host character timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62
host RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61
host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59, 12-60
interpacket delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 MSI transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62
multipacket option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . 12-70
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . 12-69
supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69
suppress power-up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
symbologies UPC-A/E/E1 check digit . . . . . . . . 12-17, 12-18
Australian postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39 US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63 time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 time delay to presentation idle mode . . . . . . . . . 6-13
codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57 time delay to presentation sleep mode . . 6-15, 6-16
codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55, 12-56 timeout between decodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57 trigger modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 unique bar code reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45, 12-46 UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-81
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28, 12-30 UPC/EAN
code 128 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 coupon code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 supp redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
code 39 check digit verification . . . . . . . . 12-37 UPC/EAN/JAN
code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38 supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29, 12-36 UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38 UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43, 12-44 UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74
convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN . . . . . 12-78 USB
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 emulate keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-75 emulate keypad with leading zero . . . . . . . 10-10
GS1 DataBar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-78 fast HID keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
GS1 DataBar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76 function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . 12-75 IBM specification level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30 ignore beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . 12-50 ignore type directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 keyboard FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15, 10-16
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . 12-32 quick emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Index - 4 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 code identifiers

SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 composite bar codes
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79
user parameter pass through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . 12-74 composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-80
validate concatenated parameter bar codes . . . 6-22 UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-81
video frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 conventions
video mode format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16, 7-17
wand emulation
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
D
suppress power-up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 data capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 data matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-85
component descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 decode distances
DP focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
HD focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
C
SR focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
chapter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv decode mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 decode zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 DP focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 HD focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63 SR/DL focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
codabar bar codes default parameters
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57 OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-55, 12-56 standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
code 11 bar codes user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 7-2
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45, 12-46 dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-4
code 128 bar codes direct part marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-3
check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-28, 12-30 discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 DP focus decode distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 DPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 3-3
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 driver’s license parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 AAMVA field bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-84 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
code 39 bar codes embedded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39 embedded ADF example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 field bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 field updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38 rule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29, 12-36 send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42 send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
code 93 bar codes version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 drop specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43, 12-44
 Index - 5

E image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
electrical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 JPEG size/quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98 video frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
exit window image resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 imager
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
exposure options imager overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, 7-12 imaging engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
exposure time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 information, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii
fixed gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 installation
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 7-12 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 mechanical drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
exposure time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
mounting imager on stand . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-5, 2-7
F mounting stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
field of view specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 interface pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
fixed gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes
focal positions check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
distance from imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52
G transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51

gain
fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 J
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-75 JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . 12-78 size/quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
GS1 DataBar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-78
GS1 DataBar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-75 L
laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
H LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
HD focus decode distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 low light enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
host types
serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
humidity specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 M
macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96
I buffer all symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-97
escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 7-12 flush buffer/abort PDF entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 transmit any symbol in set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-97
illumination system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 transmit user-selected fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 transmit/decode mode symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-97
image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16, 7-17 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63, 12-66
image options matrix 2 of 5 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27, 7-30 matrix 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64
cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16, 7-17 matrix 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65
file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-29 maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88
Index - 6 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide

mechanical drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74

microPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
modes of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . 12-74
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 presentation mode field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
imager on stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-5, 2-7 processing/control board
stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
MSI bar codes programming parameters
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62 escape characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61 macro PDF transmit/decode mode symbols . . 12-97
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-59, 12-60 transmit macro PDF user-selected fields . . . . . 12-98
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62
multicode mode
Q
expression examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-88
multicode expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
setting expression via SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 R
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

N S
notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi scanning
errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 7-2, 12-2
O sequence example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 7-2, 12-2
SE4500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
OCR serial
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-5
operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
operational mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
decode mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
snapshot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
optical JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
path and exit window diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 simple serial interface
overview commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5
handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3, 8-5
RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
P
transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83 skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 skew, pitch and roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 SNAPI
postal codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68 SDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-72 snapshot mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Australian postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71 snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73 software developer’s kit
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70 SNAPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69 SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
 Index - 7

SR focus decode distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 V

SSI
commandss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 video formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5 video mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3, 8-5 video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
SDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 W
transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
stand wand emulation default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
mounting imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-5, 2-7 window
standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
symbology default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 window coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
anti-reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
polysiloxane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
T window manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 window material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
temperature specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 acrylic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
theory of operation CR-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
processing/control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 window properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
multicode mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35

U
UPC/EAN bar codes
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17, 12-18
convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
EAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
USB
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
user preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 7-2
Index - 8 DS457 Fixed Mount Imager Integration Guide
Zebra Technologies Corporation
Lincolnshire, IL U.S.A.
http://www.zebra.com

©2017 ZIH Corp and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. ZEBRA and the stylized Zebra head are
trademarks of ZIH Corp, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.

72E-144361-05 Revision A - December 2017